Printed in the U. S. A.
2020 Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
2020
20_KL_OM_EN_USC
Cherokee
First Edition
Owner’s Manual
Cherokee
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered
trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a
registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the baery and fused as close to the baery as
possible. The negative power connection should be made
to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative baery
connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be
used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets
may aect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible
interference between the communications equipment
and the vehicle’s electronic systems.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or o-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals inclu-
ding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as ne-
cessary, service your vehicle in a well-ven-
tilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If
you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public
transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation
of features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described
in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products
previously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Copyright © 2019 FCA US LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the baery and fused as close to the baery as
possible. The negative power connection should be made
to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative baery
connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be
used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets
may aect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible
interference between the communications equipment
and the vehicle’s electronic systems.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or o-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals inclu-
ding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as ne-
cessary, service your vehicle in a well-ven-
tilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If
you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public
transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation
of features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described
in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products
previously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Copyright © 2019 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................................................13
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .........................................................................................................................................16
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..............................................................................................................137
4 SAFETY .................................................................................................................................................................................................167
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ......................................................................................................................................................261
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..............................................................................................................................................................393
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................................................438
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................................................501
9 MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................................................................................................................................512
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .............................................................................................................................................................586
11 INDEX ....................................................................................................................................................................................................591
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION ..............................................................13
ROLLOVER WARNING ...................................................14
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .......................................15
Essential Information....................................................15
Symbols...........................................................................15
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS .......................................15
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ............15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED......................16
KEYS .....................................................................................18
Key Fob ...........................................................................18
IGNITION SWITCH ...........................................................24
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped........24
Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition — If Equipped.............25
Vehicle On Message .....................................................27
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..........28
How To Use Remote Start............................................28
Remote Start Cancel Message On The Instrument
Cluster Display ..............................................................29
To Enter Remote Start Mode........................................29
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ............................................................................30
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle.............................................................................30
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped ........30
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation —
If Equipped.....................................................................31
General Information......................................................31
SENTRY KEY .......................................................................32
Key Programming ........................................................32
Replacement Keys..........................................................32
Irregular Operation .......................................................33
General Information......................................................34
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED ..........34
To Arm The System ......................................................35
To Disarm The System .................................................35
Rearming Of The System..............................................36
Security System Manual Override ..............................36
DOORS .................................................................................36
Manual Door Locks.......................................................36
Power Door Locks ........................................................37
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ........................38
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ...............................43
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......................43
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors ..............................................................................43
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 2
3
SEATS ..................................................................................44
Manual Front Seat Adjustment — If Equipped ........45
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ................................47
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped ......50
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped...........................52
Heated Seats — If Equipped........................................55
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................57
HEAD RESTRAINTS..........................................................58
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats....................58
Rear Head Restraints ....................................................59
STEERING WHEEL ............................................................61
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............................61
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .....................61
MIRRORS ............................................................................62
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped..................62
Electrochromic Mirror — If Equipped .......................63
Outside Mirrors ............................................................64
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ..................................65
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors..........................................65
EXTERIOR LIGHTS............................................................66
Multifunction Lever .....................................................66
Headlight Switch...........................................................67
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped .....67
High/Low Beam Switch...............................................67
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped ........................................................................67
Flash-To-Pass..................................................................68
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......................68
Parking Lights................................................................68
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)........................................69
Headlight Time Delay...................................................69
Lights-On Reminder .....................................................69
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................................70
Turn Signals....................................................................70
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............................71
Battery Saver...................................................................71
INTERIOR LIGHTS.............................................................71
Interior Courtesy Lights ...............................................72
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS......................74
Windshield Wiper Operation ......................................74
Intermittent Wiper System ...........................................76
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .........................77
Rear Window Wiper/Washer......................................78
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ................79
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 3
4
CLIMATE CONTROLS ......................................................79
Manual Climate Control Overview ............................79
Automatic Climate Control Overview .......................91
Climate Control Functions .........................................100
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ......................................................................101
Operating Tips ............................................................101
WINDOWS ........................................................................104
Power Window Controls............................................104
Auto-Down Feature ...................................................105
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection ........105
Reset Auto-Up..............................................................106
Window Lockout Switch ............................................106
Wind Buffeting ............................................................107
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED ........................................................................107
Opening Sunroof .........................................................109
Venting Sunroof...........................................................109
Closing Sunroof ...........................................................109
Wind Buffeting ............................................................110
Opening Power Shade ................................................110
Closing Power Shade ..................................................110
Pinch Protect Feature..................................................111
Sunroof Maintenance ..................................................111
Ignition Off Operation................................................111
HOOD ................................................................................112
Opening The Hood......................................................112
Closing The Hood........................................................113
LIFTGATE ..........................................................................113
Opening.........................................................................113
Closing...........................................................................115
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped .........................116
Cargo Area Features....................................................118
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ..............120
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®.........120
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..................123
Using HomeLink®.......................................................124
Security..........................................................................124
Troubleshooting Tips ..................................................125
General Information....................................................126
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...............................................126
Storage...........................................................................126
Cupholders ...................................................................130
Sun Visors ....................................................................131
Power Outlets...............................................................131
Power Inverter — If Equipped .................................134
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .................135
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 4
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT
PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...............................................137
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ...............................138
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .............................140
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls.........................................................................140
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped.....................................142
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ................143
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If
Equipped ......................................................................149
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ........................151
Red Warning Lights ....................................................151
Yellow Warning Lights...............................................156
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................................160
Green Indicator Lights................................................161
White Indicator Lights................................................162
Blue Indicator Lights...................................................164
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II...........164
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ...............................................................164
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ......................................................................165
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES .........................................................167
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................167
Electronic Brake Control System...............................168
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS..................................183
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped .........183
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation —
If Equipped...................................................................190
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...............195
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........................202
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ......................202
Important Safety Precautions.....................................202
Seat Belt Systems .........................................................203
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).....................217
Child Restraints............................................................237
Transporting Pets.........................................................256
SAFETY TIPS......................................................................256
Transporting Passengers ............................................256
Exhaust Gas ..................................................................257
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..........................................................................257
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...................................................................260
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 5
6
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ..............................................261
Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine ........................262
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) ...262
Extended Park Starting...............................................262
If Engine Fails To Start ...............................................263
After Starting................................................................263
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED...............263
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .............264
PARKING BRAKE ............................................................265
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ..........................................265
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ....................................270
Key Ignition Park Interlock........................................271
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System............272
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission.......................272
Gear Ranges..................................................................273
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION............................280
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If Equipped ...280
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4x4) — If Equipped....280
Shift Positions...............................................................281
Shifting Procedures.....................................................282
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System — If
Equipped.......................................................................284
SELEC-TERRAIN ..............................................................286
Description....................................................................286
POWER STEERING ..........................................................287
STOP/START SYSTEM....................................................288
Automatic Mode..........................................................288
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop........................................................................289
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode........290
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System........291
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System........291
System Malfunction.....................................................291
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .............................292
To Activate....................................................................293
To Set A Desired Speed...............................................293
To Vary The Speed Setting.........................................293
To Accelerate For Passing...........................................294
To Resume Speed ........................................................294
To Deactivate ...............................................................294
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED .........................................................................295
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation.............297
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ............297
To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................................298
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 6
7
To Activate/Deactivate ..............................................298
To Cancel ......................................................................299
To Turn Off...................................................................300
Resume..........................................................................300
To Vary The Speed Setting.........................................300
Setting The Following Distance In ACC ..................302
Overtake Aid................................................................305
ACC Operation At Stop..............................................305
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ....................306
Display Warnings And Maintenance .......................307
Precautions While Driving With ACC .....................309
General Information....................................................312
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode ..........312
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ........................................................................315
ParkSense Sensors .......................................................316
ParkSense Display.......................................................316
ParkSense Warning Display ......................................320
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........................321
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System.....321
Cleaning The ParkSense System ...............................321
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ......................322
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED .........................................................................323
ParkSense Sensors........................................................324
ParkSense Display .......................................................325
ParkSense Warning Display.......................................330
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........................330
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System..............331
Cleaning The ParkSense System................................331
ParkSense System Usage Precautions.......................332
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED .........................................................................333
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System................................................................334
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display ..........................................................................335
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display ..........................................................................344
Exiting The Parking Space..........................................353
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ......................................359
LaneSense Operation...................................................359
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................................360
LaneSense Warning Message.....................................361
Changing LaneSense Status .......................................366
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 7
8
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ......................366
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..........................................368
VEHICLE LOADING .......................................................371
Certification Label .......................................................371
TRAILER TOWING ..........................................................373
Common Towing Definitions ....................................373
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................................375
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .........................................................................376
Trailer And Tongue Weight ......................................377
Towing Requirements.................................................378
Towing Tips .................................................................381
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) .....................................................382
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle ........382
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models...........................................................................383
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit....................................................384
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit....................................................384
DRIVING TIPS...................................................................388
On-Road Driving Tips ................................................388
Off-Road Driving Tips................................................389
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS.................................393
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ............393
General Information....................................................398
BULB REPLACEMENT....................................................399
Replacement Bulbs ......................................................399
Replacing Exterior Bulbs ............................................399
FUSES..................................................................................400
General Information....................................................400
Underhood Fuses.........................................................401
Interior Fuses................................................................408
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..............................409
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage............................409
Preparations For Jacking.............................................411
Jacking Instructions.....................................................412
Road Tire Installation..................................................417
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED.............................417
Tire Service Kit Storage...............................................418
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation .........418
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........................420
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit.........................421
JUMP STARTING..............................................................426
Preparations For Jump Start.......................................427
Jump Starting Procedure ............................................428
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 8
9
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ........429
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ..................................430
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ......................................430
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ......................................431
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ................................432
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models............................434
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit.....435
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit.....435
Recovery Strap — If Equipped..................................436
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................................437
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ................................437
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .............................................438
Maintenance Plan ........................................................439
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ...............................441
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............................................442
2.0L Engine ..................................................................442
2.4L Engine ..................................................................443
3.2L Engine ..................................................................444
Checking Oil Level......................................................445
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................445
Maintenance-Free Battery ..........................................446
Pressure Washing ........................................................447
DEALER SERVICE ...........................................................447
Engine Oil ....................................................................447
Engine Oil Filter...........................................................450
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................................450
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................................452
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................................454
Body Lubrication .........................................................457
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................................458
Exhaust System ...........................................................462
Cooling System ............................................................464
Brake System ...............................................................468
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .................470
RAISING THE VEHICLE.................................................471
TIRES ..................................................................................471
Tire Safety Information...............................................471
Tires — General Information ....................................481
Tire Types .....................................................................487
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................................488
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care.....................................490
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .................................491
Tire Rotation Recommendations...............................493
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 9
10
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...............................................494
Treadwear.....................................................................494
Traction Grades ...........................................................495
Temperature Grades ...................................................495
STORING THE VEHICLE................................................495
BODYWORK......................................................................496
Protection From Atmospheric Agents......................496
Body And Underbody Maintenance.........................497
Preserving The Bodywork..........................................497
INTERIORS .......................................................................498
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................................498
Plastic And Coated Parts............................................499
Leather Parts ................................................................499
Glass Surfaces ..............................................................500
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ......................501
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................................502
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.......502
Torque Specifications..................................................502
FUEL REQUIREMENTS...................................................504
2.0L Engine ...................................................................504
2.4L & 3.2L Engines.....................................................504
Reformulated Gasoline ...............................................504
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ......................................505
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles............505
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ................505
MMT In Gasoline.........................................................506
Materials Added To Fuel............................................506
Fuel System Cautions..................................................506
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................................507
FLUID CAPACITIES.........................................................508
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ..........................................509
Engine............................................................................509
Chassis...........................................................................511
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................................................512
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR...........................................512
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................513
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 10
11
UCONNECT SETTINGS..................................................514
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
3 Settings.......................................................................514
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4 Personal Settings.......................................................528
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings...................................................544
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ........................................................................562
Radio Operation ..........................................................562
Media Mode .................................................................562
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ...........563
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..........564
Regulatory And Safety Information .........................564
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS ....................................................................................566
Introducing Uconnect .................................................566
Get Started....................................................................567
Basic Voice Commands ..............................................568
Radio .............................................................................568
Media.............................................................................570
Phone.............................................................................572
Voice Text Reply..........................................................573
Climate ..........................................................................574
Navigation (4C NAV) .................................................576
SiriusXM Guardian™ (4C/4C NAV) — If
Equipped.......................................................................577
Register (4C/4C NAV)................................................578
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) ..........578
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV).........................................578
SiriusXM® Travel Link (4C NAV) ............................579
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped .................................580
Using Do Not Disturb ................................................581
Android Auto™ — If Equipped ...............................582
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped ...............................583
General Information....................................................585
Additional Information...............................................585
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR
VEHICLE ...........................................................................586
Prepare For The Appointment...................................586
Prepare A List...............................................................586
Be Reasonable With Requests....................................586
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 11
12
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .........................................586
FCA US LLC Customer Center..................................587
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ..........................587
In Mexico Contact........................................................587
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ..........................587
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) .................................................588
Service Contract ..........................................................588
WARRANTY INFORMATION.......................................589
MOPAR® PARTS..............................................................589
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...................................589
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.......589
In Canada......................................................................590
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...................................590
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 12
13
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that are not intended for conventional
passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently
from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so
take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped,
the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for
on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or
use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive
vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle
controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, trans-
mission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience. When driving off-road, or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the
vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always
observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever
you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supple-
mented by Warranty Information, and customer oriented
documents. In the Warranty Information, available online,
you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers, the Warranty Certificate and the
details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its
validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time.
Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and
important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related to
the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased.
Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Informa-
1
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 13
14 INTRODUCTION
tion, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will
be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data
contained in this publication are intended to help you use
your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a
constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground
clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may
roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive care-
fully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is
a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US govern-
ment notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could
cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and
could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle
up.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 14
INTRODUCTION 15
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations
may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose
symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury, and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 15
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through your Ucon-
nect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system (if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touch-
screen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. From there, press
the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Ucon-
nect registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the
vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle is in
motion, the system will display: Feature not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Pre-Installed Features
• Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
• Touchscreen convenience
• Maintenance schedules and information
• Comprehensive icon & symbol glossary
• Available when and where you need it
• Customizable interface
• Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able
to explore your warranty information and radio manual
when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system
displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio
to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no app
to download, no phone to connect and no external device
needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year,
in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
• Operating Instructions
• Warranty Information
• Fluid Level Standards
• Maintenance Schedules
• Emergency Procedures
• 911 Contact and More
TIP:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to your
Favorites, for easy access in the future.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fob
The key fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square
end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the
instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. The key
fob also contains an emergency key, which is stored in the
rear of the key fob.
Key Fob For Standard Ignition
Your vehicle may be equipped with a keyless ignition
system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP ignition
button system. The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of
a key fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and lift-
gate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Key Fob For Keyless Ignition Key Fob With Emergency Key
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of
a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow.
1 — Liftgate Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — PANIC Button
1 — Emergency Key
2 — Key Fob
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emer-
gency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
NOTE:
Improper disposal of key fob batteries may be harmful to the
environment. Please see an authorized dealer for proper
battery disposal.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push the interior door unlock button on the door panel.
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of
the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked using the interior door panel, and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped, the security alarm will arm. To change the
current setting, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia"
for further information.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the
driver's door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” located
in “Multimedia” for further programmable information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically if
the key is left inside the passenger compartment, otherwise
the doors will stay locked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With Remote
Control
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separating key fob halves requires screw removal (if
equipped), and gently prying the two halves of the key
fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing
alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together, reposition and secure the screw.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob
is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any
other vehicle.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key
fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF mode.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IGNITION SWITCH
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released
from the START position, the switch automatically returns to
the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Switch
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The push button ignition operating modes are OFF, ACC,
ON/RUN, and START.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push of a
button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emer-
gency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
START/STOP Ignition Button
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking, alarm, etc.) are
still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
ON/RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• Start the engine.
NOTE:
The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located inside the
cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles
in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
NOTE:
For further information, refer to "Starting The Engine" in
"Starting And Operating."
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in ON/
RUN (engine not running) position, a chime will sound to
remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-
tion to the chime, the message “Ignition or Accessory ON”
will display in the cluster.
NOTE:
The power window switches and power sunroof (if
equipped) will remain active for three minutes after the igni-
tion is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is program-
mable.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
apply the parking brake, place the engine in the OFF
position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always make sure the keyless ignition is in “OFF” posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Push the remote start button on the key fob twice within five
seconds. Pushing the remote start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce
this range.
How To Use Remote Start
Push the remote start button on the key fob twice within five
seconds. Pushing the remote start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, insert the key
in the ignition and turn to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes
(timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
• The vehicle must be started with the key after two consec-
utive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine
will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles
in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Check engine light shall not be present
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an intrusion
Remote Start Cancel Message On The Instrument
Cluster Display
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start, or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
• Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the key fob twice
within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide
(CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle
will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation
(if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with the
key fob. However, the ignition must be cycled by pushing
the START/STOP ignition button twice (or the ignition
switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable
with a one time push of the remote start button for two
seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and disarm
the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the
end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button. If the START/STOP ignition button is
not present, insert the key fob into the ignition switch and
turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Push Start Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat feature will automatically turn on in
cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
RUN position.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation —
If Equipped
When remote start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting remote start will resume
previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation
will continue.
Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further
information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and
a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained
from another vehicle.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addi-
tion, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indi-
cates that someone attempted to start the engine with an
invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle elec-
tronics, the engine will start and shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob
is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any
other vehicle.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key
fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Irregular Operation
The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node Module, Keyless
Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unautho-
rized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if
an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the vehicle.
The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also considered
an invalid key.
During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition
in the ON/RUN mode, the Vehicle Security Light will turn
on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with
the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key
fob to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
• The horn will pulse.
• The turn signals will flash.
• The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to OFF.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make sure
the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door
Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exte-
rior zone. Refer to "Doors" in "Getting To Know Your
Vehicle" for further information.
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the
following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to unlock the door,
refer to "Doors" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for
further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of OFF mode to disarm the system.
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm will arm, regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off
after 29 seconds, five seconds between cycles, up to eight
cycles if the trigger remains active and the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors
using the manual door locks.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel until the red area is hidden. To unlock the front
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate
the door lock button until the red indicator is visible. To
unlock the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the
red indicator is visible.
If the red indicator is hidden when you shut the door, the
door is locked. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate.
Lock Knob And Door Handle
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on each front door
panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switches
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as
when you park and exit the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make sure
the keyless ignition is cycled to OFF, and remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
1 — Power Door Unlock Switch
2 — Power Door Lock Switch
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the keys are
found inside the car when door lock button on trim is used
to lock the door. At the third attempt, the doors will lock
even if the key is inside.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in ACC or
ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside the
vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be
unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s
Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock
and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response
time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is
opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if
equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block
the key fob's wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
• Passive Entry activates illuminated approach for the time
set by the customer (0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds), and flashes
the turn signal lights. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver's door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver's door automatically.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors will
unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle.
To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle
to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle
is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference
setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob
In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is OFF.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in
any passive entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the
door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs.
• If a paired key fob is found outside of the vehicle,
FOBIK-Safe will not activate.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door
panel switch and then close the doors.
• If the liftgate is opened and then all 4 doors are locked, the
key fob will become locked in the vehicle if the liftgate is
closed and will not alert the customer.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Passive Entry button located to the left of
the liftgate release handle to open the liftgate with one fluid
motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Passive Entry button located to the left of
the liftgate release handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock all doors and
the liftgate.
Liftgate Passive Entry / Release Handle Location
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Liftgate Release Handle
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the Passive Entry lock button located on the outside door
handle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two
seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using
either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you
to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle
without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect System, the
key protection described in "Preventing Inadvertent
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle" remains
active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in PARK (P), then
is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door
lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
• After engaging or disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the
door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden
(unlocked position), roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for effec-
tive engagement by trying to open a door with the internal
handle. Once the child protection door lock system is
engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be sure to check that
there is no one left inside.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged
(locked).
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
• Adjusting the seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control, which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Manual Front Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar is
located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
Front Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious injury
or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s and passenger’s seat height can be raised or
lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the
seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Seat Height Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release
the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward
and release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could
result in serious injury or death.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
Rear Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment — If Equipped
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat
near the floor and release it when the seat is at the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
Rear Seat Recline Adjustment
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. On vehicle’s equipped with a sliding rear seat, pull
on the pull strap while sitting in the rear seat to recline the
seatback.
Rear Sliding Seat Recliner Pull Straps
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicle’s equipped with a fixed rear seat, pull on the
handle located on the upper outboard side of the seatback.
Rear Fixed Seat Recline Lever
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to position
the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be sure that the
front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This
will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper outer
edge of the seat. If your vehicle is equipped with a sliding
rear seat, you can also pull the pull strap located on the
middle outer edge of the seat.
Rear Sliding Seat Release Lever And Pull Strap
Rear Fixed Seat Release Lever
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
placing the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback
from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat
to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's seat
and/or power passenger seat. The power seat switch and
power seat recliner switch are located on the outboard side
of the seat near the floor. Use the power seat switch to adjust
seat height, angle, or forward/rearward position. Use the
power seat recline switch to adjust the angle of the seat back.
Power Seat Switch
NOTE:
Do not place objects beneath the adjustable seat or impede
proper seat adjustment.
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch and the front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The seat-
back will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could
result in serious injury or death.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may
be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch
is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the
switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the
lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to
raise or lower the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of desired radio
station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver's side door
panel. The switch contains three buttons, a set (S) button to
activate the memory save function, memory button (1) and
memory button (2). The memory switch allows the driver to
recall either of the two pre-programmed memory profiles by
pushing the appropriate number button on the switch.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Driver Memory Switch
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile
from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences
(i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch,
then push memory button (1) within five seconds. The
instrument cluster display will display which memory
position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences
(i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch,
then push memory button (2) within five seconds. The
instrument cluster display will display which memory
position is being set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall a memory
profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to “Linking
And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To
Memory” in this section.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be programmed to
recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles with a
push of the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system screen.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to
“Programming The Memory Feature” in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch,
then within five seconds push and release the button
labeled (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or
2) will display in the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory settings by
pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a
recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK (P), a
message will display in the instrument cluster display.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one, push memory
button number (1) or the unlock button on the key fob
linked to memory position 1.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two, push
memory button number (2) or the unlock button on the key
fob linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is canceled,
the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one second will
occur before another recall can be selected.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehicle’s
ignition to the OFF position.
• When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rear-
ward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
return to its previously set position when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit
to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy
Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle
is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is
enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable
features in the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insu-
lates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause serious burns due
to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within the
Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control buttons
through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting
on.
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until changed by the
operator.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s
heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two outboard rear seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats are
located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. Amber indi-
cator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insu-
lates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause serious burns due
to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and
none for off.
• Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting
on.
• Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
• Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two
to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide
a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of opera-
tion. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level.
The level of heat selected will stay on until changed by the
operator.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that draw
the air from the passenger compartment and move air
through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose
LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the
ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s
ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the
head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact, the RHRs will automatically extend forward mini-
mizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and
the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position
following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to their
normal position, see your authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then,
push the release button and the adjustment button at the
base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. Seat-
back angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the head
restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate
a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
(Continued)
Front Head Restraint
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have two positions: up and
down. The center head restraint has three positions: up, mid,
and down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be adjusted to the occupant. When there is
no occupant in the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a colli-
sion and could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then,
push the release button and the adjustment button at the
base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To rein-
stall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to
the appropriate height.
Outboard Head Restraint
Center Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or
downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the control handle upward
until fully engaged.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of
80 minutes before automatically shutting off. This time will
vary based on environmental temperatures. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when
the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
• Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the
heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to
turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by
moving the small control under the mirror to the night posi-
tion (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be
adjusted while set in the day position (toward the wind-
shield).
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insu-
lates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel
covers of any type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
NOTE:
The vehicle is equipped with either a single ball joint mirror
or a two ball adjustable prism mirror.
• The single ball joint is a twist-on mirror that has a fixed
position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the
windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and
requires no tools for mounting.
• The two ball joint is mounted to a tombstone button on the
windshield with a set screw. Tools are required for
mounting and dismounting.
Electrochromic Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counter-
clockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The
mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on
the view through the rear window.
Automatic Dimming Button
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The automatic dimming feature is disabled when the vehicle
is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
The automatic dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen, or using the power button on the
base of the mirror.
• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature
on.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn the
feature off.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much
wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switches are located on the driver's door
trim panel.
Power Mirror Switches
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped).
Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover
1 — Left And Right Mirror Select
2 — Mirror Direction Control
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover will turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Multifunction Lever
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instru-
ment panel. This switch controls the operation of the head-
lights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if equipped),
instrument panel lights, and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine is
started and remain on unless the headlamps are turned on,
the parking brake is applied, or the engine is cycled to OFF.
NOTE:
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further details.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, away from you to switch the headlights to
high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch
the headlights back to low beam.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides
increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam
control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific
light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The multifunction lever must be in the high beam position
in order to activate the Automatic High Beams.
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of
vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain
on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause
the system to function improperly.
When set to AUTO, the system automatically turns the head-
lights on or off based on ambient light levels.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent
(AUTO position) for automatic headlight operation. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on.
This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after you cycle the ignition to OFF. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO posi-
tion.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will come
on in the automatic mode.
Parking Lights
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE:
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off using the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for
up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle
in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, cycle the ignition to OFF while
the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights
within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the head-
light switch is turned off.
NOTE:
The headlight delay feature is automatically activated if the
customer leaves the headlight switch in the AUTO position
while the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the
ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of cycling
the ignition to OFF to activate this feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is
cycled OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the
driver's door is opened.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights and push the headlight switch. To
turn off the front fog lights, either push the headlight switch
a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when
the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or
parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam head-
lights will turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on
each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective LED turn signal in
the headlamp. Please see an authorized dealer for service.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn signal
is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on
the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing.
The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the
turn signal is turned off.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left)
will flash three times then automatically turn off.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding is
provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes
or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome
on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automati-
cally turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off auto-
matically 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. This
will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or
are on because a door is open. The Battery Protection also
includes the glove compartment light and the cargo light. To
restore interior light operation after automatic battery
protection is enabled (lights off), either place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
console. Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on
either side of the console. To turn the lights off, push the
switch a second time. These lights also turn on when a door
is opened, or when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned completely
upward to the second detent.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the headlight
switch and is located on the driver’s side of the instrument
panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the instru-
ment panel dimmer control upward will increase the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders —
if equipped.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument panel
dimmer control is in this position.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, door handle lights, under
instrument panel lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby
bin lights.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme
bottom (O) off position. The interior lights will remain off
when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on
the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/
Washer” in this section.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent posi-
tions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low wiper
operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE:
Do not operate the windshield wipers with the blades lifted
from the windshield.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position,
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occa-
sional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward
to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; there-
fore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The
wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield
with washer fluid.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable delay
between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph
(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a maximum of
approximately 18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a
cycle every one second (fourth detent).
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature
is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this
feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multi-
function lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive,
and wiper delay position four is the most sensitive.
NOTE:
Setting three is preferred by the average driver during
normal rain conditions.
Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF
position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper
switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when
ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
cycled ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature is greater than
32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL (N) Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved
out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not opera-
tional when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has cycled the ignition to RUN,
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previ-
ously) exist.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the wind-
shield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a
switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while in
the intermittent setting, the wiper will turn on and
operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval previ-
ously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position,
the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is
held for more than 20 seconds. Once the lever is released the
pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is cycled OFF,
the wiper will automatically return to the “park” position.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
• Activation By Front Defrost— The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
when the ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and when the ambient temperature is
below 33°F (0.6°C).
• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When remote
start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less
than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer shall be
enabled. On exiting remote start resume previous opera-
tion except, if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and
operation shall continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel
below the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Blower Control
Use the blower control knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you
select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
Temperature Control
Use the temperature control knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Turning the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale,
indicates cooler temperatures. Turning the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted
to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes
to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when A/
C is on.
Icon Description
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MAX A/C Setting
Turn the temperature control knob to the MAX Air Conditioning (A/C) setting to engage MAX Air
Conditioning (A/C). This is the coldest setting.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode.
The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is
pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or humidity
are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can
be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the windshield and
side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster
is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Icon Description
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display With Manual Temperature Controls
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display With Manual Temperature Controls
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display With Manual Temperature Controls
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest
output of air. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again
will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the
current setting. The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the
system between Recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode
may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the
faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or
press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only appear if the system is equipped with an auto-
matic climate control system.
Icon Description
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically
exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Blower
Knob
Touchscreen
Blower Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to
increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the
icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Icon Description
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Icon Description
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow through the floor, defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat
to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Faceplate OFF
Button
Touchscreen OFF
Button
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Icon Description
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display With Automatic Temperature Controls
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display With Automatic Temperature Controls
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display With Automatic Temperature Controls
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest
output of air. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again
will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the
current setting. The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the
system between Recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist
that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Faceplate Auto
Button
Touchscreen Auto
Button
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the
current setting. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. This feature automatically
controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this
function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to
“Automatic Operation” within this section for further information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Icon Description
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the
faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or
press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only appear if the system is equipped with an auto-
matic climate control system.
Icon Description
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically
exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Blower
Knob
Touchscreen
Blower Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to
increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the
icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Icon Description
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Icon Description
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow through the floor, defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat
to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Faceplate OFF
Button
Touchscreen OFF
Button
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Icon Description
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system.
When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu-
midified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For
improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the
air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow
mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level,
or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor
or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C
system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the
windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in
front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radi-
ator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior
settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will
cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if condi-
tions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped, the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the
control button to blink and then turns off.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to func-
tion automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause
window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost
or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as
fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the wind-
shield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected
in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months,
make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the
heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window.
Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with
warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air
filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element located at
the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions are met:
• Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold
weather manual start with full defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
• Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear
Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is
below 33°F (0.6°C).
• Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C) the wind-
shield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Remote
Start, the climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the
de-icer timer and operation will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to ,
on, and blower on high.
Roll down the windows for
a minute to flush out the hot
air. Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn
on and set the mode control
to the position.
Cool Sunny Operate in position.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver's door control all the door
windows.
Power Window Switches
Cool & Humid Conditions
Set the mode control to
and turn on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to the
position. If windshield
fogging starts to occur,
move the control to the
position.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
1 — Front Driver’s Side Power Window Switch
2 — Front Passenger’s Side Power Window Switch
3 — Rear Passenger’s Side Power Window Switch
4 — Rear Driver’s Side Power Window Switch
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The
window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the front and rear
passenger doors window switches have an Auto-Down
feature.
Push the window switch down for half a second and release.
The window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch
briefly.
To open the window part way (manually), push the window
switch down briefly and release.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of time, and
release and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not
let children play with power windows. Do not leave the
key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure,
it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If
this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the
window manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window prob-
ably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (the indicator light on the
button will turn on). To enable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout button again (the indicator
light on the button will turn back off).
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
Power Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pres-
sure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your
vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down,
or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.
If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the
front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The power shade switches are located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob
in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be
seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt
properly and make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
Opening Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed open positions, comfort
stop position and full open position. The comfort stop posi-
tion is set to minimize wind buffeting when driving with
side windows closed and sunroof open. If the sunshade is in
the closed position when initiating a sunroof open or vent
command the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second, the sunroof will open to the comfort stop position
and automatically stop. Push the switch rearward and
release it again, the sunroof will open to the full open posi-
tion and automatically stop. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the switch rearward, the sunroof will open to
the comfort stop position and automatically stop. Push the
switch rearward and hold it again, the sunroof will open to
the full open position and automatically stop. Any release of
the switch will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will
remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is
pushed and held again.
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the "Vent" button within one-half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called
“Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof posi-
tion. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.
This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close opera-
tion, any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pres-
sure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your
vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down,
or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.
If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then
open the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open
any window.
Opening Power Shade
The sunshade has two programmed open positions, half
open and full open positions. When opening the sunshade
from the closed position the sunshade will always stop at the
half open position regardless of express or manual open
operation. The switch must be actuated again to continue on
to full open position.
Express
Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second, the sunshade will open to the half open
position and stop automatically. Push and release the switch
again from the half open position and the sunshade will
open to the full open position and stop automatically. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the shade will
open to the half open position and stop automatically. Push
and hold the sunshade switch rearward again and the shade
will open automatically to the full-open position. Any
release of the switch will stop the movement and the
sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until
the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade
If the sunroof is open or vented the sunshade cannot be
closed beyond the half open position. Pushing the sunshade
close switch when the sunroof is open/vented and the
sunshade is at half open position will first automatically
close sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Express
Push the sunshade switch forward and release it within
one-half second. If the sunroof is in closed position the
sunshade will full close automatically from any position. If
the sunroof is open or vented the sunshade will close to the
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
half open position and stop; push and release the sunshade
switch forward again to automatically close both the sunroof
and sunshade completely. This is called “Express Close”.
During Express Close operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunshade.
Manual
Push and hold the sunshade switch forward. If the sunroof is
in closed position the sunshade will full close from any posi-
tion. If the sunroof is open or vented the sunshade will close
to the half open position and stop; pushing and holding the
sunshade switch forward again will close both the sunroof
and sunshade completely. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the sunshade will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will auto-
matically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof
must be closed in Manual Mode.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is cycled
to the OFF/LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
Opening The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety
latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety latch
release lever is located behind the front edge of the hood,
slightly off-center to the right.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Closing The Hood
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the
engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the hood is
completely closed.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the electronic
liftgate release handle (refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry” in this section) or by pushing the liftgate
button on the key fob. Push the liftgate button on the key fob
twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once
the liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within five
seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by pushing
the liftgate button located on the instrument panel to right of
the headlight switch. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate
can be closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the
left rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is
in motion, pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear
trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Passive Entry button located to the left of
liftgate release handle to lock the liftgate and doors.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood
is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in Uconnect,
all doors will unlock when you push the Passive Entry
button on the liftgate. If "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" is
programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate will unlock when you
push the Passive Entry button on the liftgate. Refer to “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Liftgate Entry
NOTE:
• Use the power door lock switch on either front door trim
panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate.
• The manual door locks on the doors and the driver's door
lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
• Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure:
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, the
liftgate can be released by accessing the service release
feature in the latch. This can be done using a 3 mm
diameter screwdriver.
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen. Place the
screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the lever and
release the latch.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the
liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power lift-
gate functionality.
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Liftgate Release Handle
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers
could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by pushing the lift-
gate release handle and pulling upward in one fluid motion.
Closing
There are several different ways to close the liftgate:
• Manually by grasping the liftgate closing handle and initi-
ating lowering of the liftgate. Release the handle when the
liftgate takes over the closing effort.
• Key Fob
• Hands-Free
• Liftgate Instrument Panel Button
• Power Liftgate Button On The Pillar In The Cargo Area
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
lock/push button located to the left of the back-up camera
will lock the vehicle only.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the button,
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. Pushing
the button will only close the liftgate. This button cannot be
used to open the liftgate.
Rear Power Liftgate Button
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activation, use
a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle activa-
tion zone in the general location below the rear license plate.
Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or
the sensors may not detect the motion.
NOTE:
Activation zone is the same for vehicles equipped with and
without trailer tow package.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will
chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate will open
after approximately one second, or close after approximately
three seconds. This assumes all options are enabled in the
radio.
NOTE:
• Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft
(1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any kicks.
• The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or off in
Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information. The Hands-Free Liftgate
feature should be turned off during Jacking, Tire
Changing, Manual Car Wash, and Vehicle Service.
• The Hands-Free liftgate feature can be activated by any
metallic object making a similar in-and-out motion under
the rear bumper, such as cleaning using a metal broom.
• The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the trans-
mission is in PARK (P).
• If anything obstructs the Hands-Free liftgate while it is
opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically reverse
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
(Continued)
to the closed/open position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance.
• There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate
opening. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will
cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop.
If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated manually.
• The power liftgate will release, but not power open, in
temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to remove any
buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before opening the
liftgate.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the
liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power lift-
gate functionality.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature,
it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the lift-
gate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate
obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or
reverse its direction.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen-
gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make
sure that all windows are closed, and the climate
control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use
the recirculation mode.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before
driving away.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg).
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this
section for further information.
Cargo Extension Panels (Only With Sliding Rear Seat) —
If Equipped
Cargo extension panels can be folded and unfolded. When
the rear seats are moved to the more forward positions and
the rear seat backs are folded down, the extension panels (2)
can be unfolded manually by hand. The extension panels can
be used to extend the load floor to the rear seats and/or hide
the gap between the load floor and rear seats or to assist in
loading large items into the cargo area.
NOTE:
If equipped with a cargo area floor mat, the mat must be
removed before unfolding the extension panels.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be used
to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose.
A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors
provided for child seat tethers.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat
belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described
on the label attached to the left door or left door center
pillar.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle on
the sides of the load floor.
Rear Storage Bins
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle.
Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or
behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink®
unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the driver’s side sun
visor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels.
The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is
active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at Home-
Link.com for information or assistance.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified
by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close
the door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1. Cycle the ignition to ON/RUN.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after
the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed Home-
Link® button twice (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener/device activates,
programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the
button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the
training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to ON/RUN.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
to rapid.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that
require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several
seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to
time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or
gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, while
you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all chan-
nels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-held
transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com
for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not
program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans-
ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features. Call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Glove Compartment
There is also an additional storage bin located above the
instrument panel in the center of the dash.
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower storage area
which can hold cell phones, PDAs, and other small items.
Center Console
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in
the open position. Driving with the glove compartment
open may result in injury in a collision.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To access the upper storage compartment, lift the top latch.
Upper Storage Compartment Latch
To access the lower storage compartment, lift the bottom
latch.
Lower Storage Compartment Latch
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
Instrument Panel Cubby
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument panel
cubby. The cubby is located on the top of the instrument
panel, above the radio.
To open the instrument panel cubby, pull the latch toward
you and the cubby door will pop open.
Instrument Panel Cubby Latch
Instrument Panel Cubby Opened
To close the instrument panel cubby, push down on the door
until it latches.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 129
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers,
located in the center armrest.
Rear Cupholders
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 130
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
Sun Visors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover
upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover will turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small elec-
tronics, and other low powered electrical accessories. The
power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
labeled with a “key” are powered when the ignition switch
is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with
a “battery” are connected directly to the battery and
powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery” powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 131
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area in
front of the shifter.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
Center Console Power Outlet
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
(Continued)
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet has
power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to “battery”
powered anytime by switching the power outlet Power
Distribution Center panel fuse from fuse location F91 to F81.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at all
times)
2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position)
3 — F60 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 133
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Inverter — If Equipped
Rear Center Console Power Inverter
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain high-end game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device is
unplugged.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accesso-
ries still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a suffi-
cient length of time to allow the generator to recharge
the vehicle's battery.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 134
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135
(Continued)
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should
automatically reset. To avoid overloading the circuit, check
the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the
inverter.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a luggage
rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it should be
uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed
on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized dealer
through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and
luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage
rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure
the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should
be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the surface
of the roof and the load.
2
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 135
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. It is recom-
mended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first, with
tie down loops used as additional securing points if
needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie
down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms
with the tie loops. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 136
137
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 137
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driver-inter-
active display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
within this section for further information.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 138
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN mode.
• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates
that the engine cooling system is operating satisfacto-
rily.
• The gauge will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the
ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn
the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 139
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver-interac-
tive display located on the instrument panel, your instru-
ment cluster display can show you how systems are working
and give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the
main menus and submenus. You can access the specific
information you want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 140
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display menu items consist of the
following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip Info
• Stop/Start
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — OK Button
5 — Down Arrow Button
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 141
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the OK button for one second to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next sched-
uled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time
you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off
the message temporarily, push and release the OK button.
To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to “Oil Life” submenu in “Vehicle Info” in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
100%.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 142
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in the
center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary
depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle
units (mph or km/h) of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to
scroll through the information submenus and push and
release the OK button to select or reset the resettable
submenus.
• Tire Pressure: This menu option will display the current
tire pressure. A low tire will be highlighted in red for the
7 inch cluster and it will be highlighted in white text for
the 3.5 inch cluster.
• Coolant Temperature: This menu option will display the
current coolant temperature of the vehicle.
• Transmission Temperature: This menu will display the
current transmission temperature of the vehicle.
• Oil Life: This menu option will display the current oil life
of the vehicle.
• Oil Temperature: This menu option will display the
current oil temperature level of the vehicle.
• Battery Voltage: This menu option will display the
current voltage level of the battery.
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 143
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC and
LaneSense system settings. The information displayed
depends on the status of ACC and LaneSense.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not
been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the instru-
ment cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument
cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last display
selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 144
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current Lane-
Sense system settings. The information displayed depends
on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to
be met. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel
Economy menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select the
screen with or without current fuel economy display. Push
and hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy
feature.
• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi or
km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the
tank. When the Range value is less than 10 miles (16 km)
estimated driving distance, the Range display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a significant amount
of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL”
message and a new Range value will display. Range
cannot be reset through the OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will
greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle,
regardless of the Range displayed value.
• Average – The display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.
• Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) form while driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip
menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip
B. The Trip information will display the following:
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled for
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel economy
(MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip B since the
last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel since
Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 145
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button will allow
you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instru-
ment cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as
needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
the location where that information is displayed.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 146
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp. (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average MPG (or L / 100 km or km / L)
• Current MPG (or L / 100 km or km / L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
Upper Right
• None
• Compass (default)
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average MPG (or L / 100 km or km / L)
• Current MPG (or L / 100 km or km / L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 147
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average MPG (or L / 100 km or km / L)
• Current MPG (or L / 100 km or km / L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio
• Speedometer
• Menu Title (default)
Favorite Menus
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist (show/hide)
• Fuel Economy (show/hide)
• Trip Info (show/hide)
• Stop/Start
• Audio (show/hide)
• (Stored) Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
Odometer — If Equipped With A Premium Cluster
• On (default)
• Off
Gear Display — If Equipped With A Premium Cluster
• Full (default)
• Single
Defaults (defaults: Outside Temp UL, Compass UR, Center
Menu Title)
• Restore
• Cancel
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 148
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the
vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load
reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time
and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power
to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It
will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to
the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical
supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of
charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that
the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduction.
The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a
problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Warning Lights And
Messages” located in this section for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load reduc-
tion:
• Heated Seats / Vented Seats / Heated Wheel
• Heated / Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 150W Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 149
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are
larger than the capability of charging system. The charging
system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC
to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded
power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stop-
ping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the engine
not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12 Volts
portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
• Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior).
• Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12 Volts,
150W, USB ports.
• Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature).
• Check the audio settings (volume).
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 150
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (addi-
tional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems,
alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the message
is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation
of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify
the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indic-
ative and precautionary and must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read care-
fully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales
will display first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not
appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the
air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 151
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In
this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the
ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in
the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A
leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake
fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a spec-
ified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle
should have service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/
RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the
light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 152
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
The light will also turn on when the parking brake is applied
with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the
Electric Power Steering (EPS) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either
stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the “PARK (P)”
position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on
with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 153
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are
pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your
Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left open
and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil
pressure. A chime will sound when this light turns on and a
message “Oil Pressure Low” will display in the message
screen. If the light turns on while driving, pull the vehicle to
the side of the road at a safe location, stop the vehicle, shut
off the engine as soon as possible, check the oil level and
correct the oil level if it is low. Contact an authorized dealer.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light may or may not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked according to section
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 154
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
“Scheduling Service” Checking Oil Level. If the oil level is
low and corrected, the engine can be restarted. Otherwise the
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
The light may flash, a message in the center of the dash may
display momentarily “low oil pressure” and a chime may
occur during sharp cornering maneuvers. If this happen it
may indicate a low oil level. The oil level should be checked
and dealer service performed if this occurs.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil
temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmis-
sion fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the trans-
mission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns
off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive
normally.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is driven with low oil levels severe engine
damage can occur. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 155
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer for service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
— Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Electronic
Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning
and service is required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is also not on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability
Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC
is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilome-
ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 156
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
• The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when
ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L) this
light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense
system is not operating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
— LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when the
vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light will
flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light
(MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control
systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 157
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle
will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the
4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during driving,
it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immedi-
ately.
— Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact your local authorized
dealer for service. Refer to “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) With Mitigation” in “Safety” for further information.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 158
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
— Service Stop / Start System Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is
not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
— Speed Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Speed
Control System is not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning
Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to
indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In
these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 159
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check
the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal when there is a
fault detected with the Active Speed Limiter.
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates that Forward Collision Warning is off.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size equipped
on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 160
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a
greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information on
four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
— Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been acti-
vated.
Green Indicator Lights
— Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on
and set to a specific speed.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is
detected. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target
Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system
when the system is engaged. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is
set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights
are on.
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 161
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Stop / Start Active Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is
in “Autostop” mode.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal
indicator will flash independently and the corresponding
exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be acti-
vated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
— Active Speed Limiter Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on,
but not set.
/ — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
has been turned on, but is not set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control ” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 162
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has reached the speed
desired and the set button has been selected. Refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is
armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in
the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then
30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while
attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the Lane-
Sense indicator light illuminates solid white. This occurs
when only left, right, or neither lane line has been detected.
If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide
only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs on the detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
— Selec Speed Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec Speed Control” is acti-
vated.
To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the vehicle is Four
Wheel Drive (4WD) Low and push the button on the Instru-
ment Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed Shift
to 4WD Low” will appear in the instrument cluster display.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control has been
turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 163
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(Continued)
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push
the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating properly,
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel
economy, as well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access
this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will
soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect
equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to
read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 164
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multi-
media”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure
to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test
over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information stored
in your vehicle systems, including personal infor-
mation.
WARNING! (Continued)
3
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 165
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off position
or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD
II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an autho-
rized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system to update.
A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that
the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle oper-
ation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to
the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 166
167
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking
sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one
or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves
• Brake pedal pulsations
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop
NOTE:
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment
that may be susceptible to interference caused by
improperly installed or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equip-
ment should be performed by qualified professionals.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
ABS is designed to function with the Original Equipment
Manufacturing (OEM) tires. Modification may result in
degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is
on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake
Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction
Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking
or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent
Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not func-
tioning properly and that immediate service is required. If
the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the
vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situa-
tion by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the
brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking
is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the
BAS is deactivated.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) is a feature of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) and the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
modules, that provides torque at the steering wheel for
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
certain driving conditions, in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle
stability. The only notification the driver receives that the
feature is active is the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the
correct course of action through small torques on the steering
wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reac-
tion to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that
this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is
still responsible for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) function
manages the distribution of the braking torque between the
front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear
axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system anticipates the
potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM deter-
mines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift,
it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road condi-
tions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehi-
cles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if
equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or under-
steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path
intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of
the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than appro-
priate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than appro-
priate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alter-
nate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as
noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows
for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may
be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC
OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will illumi-
nate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will turn off.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control
due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only
a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of
your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of
the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspen-
sion, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may
adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated
and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
(Continued)
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary
button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary
button pushed may be required to return to ESC On.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC OFF” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message
will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When
the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if
equipped).
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the igni-
tion is turned to the ON mode. It should turn off
with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when
TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road condi-
tions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when
ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to mitigate
roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the
driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA
will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If
the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires,
the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• The park brake must be off.
• The driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing
uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK
(P) or NEUTRAL (N). For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete attention is
always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight
forward)
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P)
3. Apply the park brake
4. Start the engine
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half turn
to the left
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an addi-
tional slightly more than one-half turn to the right
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its
previous setting
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the
trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with
the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake
pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a
hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake or apply more
vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK (P).
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of
wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle.
If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in a reduced mode.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking perfor-
mance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield
wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is
active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur
by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low speed
off-road driving while in 4L Range. HDC maintains vehicle
speed while descending hills during various driving situa-
tions. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the
brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle
speed).
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4L Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
• Park brake is released
• Driver door is closed
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven
down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for
HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using
the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the HDC set
speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not acti-
vate.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target
speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmis-
sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,
is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch
• The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range
• The park brake is applied
• Driver door opens
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (HDC
exits immediately)
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch
has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver about
the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is
the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC
switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to excess
speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
Selec Speed Control (SSC) is intended for off road driving in
4L only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle
speed).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the following
conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4L Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
• Park brake is released
• Driver door is closed
• Driver is not applying throttle
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the
following conditions are met:
• Driver releases throttle
• Driver releases brake
• Transmission is in any selection other than PARK (P)
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC
set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and the
level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of
grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. While actively controlling SSC the transmis-
sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode.
This difference may be notable to the driver and may be
perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the SSC switch
• The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range
• The park brake is applied
• Driver door opens
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (SSC
exits immediately)
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch
has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the state
SSC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This is
the normal operating condition for SSC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC
switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to excess
speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extinguish
when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the vehicle to
recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will
become active automatically once an excessively swaying
trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced
and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full
Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two
radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM
system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward
gear or REVERSE (R) and enters stand-by mode when the
vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.7 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends approxi-
mately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The
BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehi-
cles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly
approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone does NOT change if your
vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the
adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of
your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience
drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning
Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of
time (more than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contam-
ination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not
block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.).
Sensor Location
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present
on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time, both the visual
and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side
of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind
spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehi-
cles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will
not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does
not require service.
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are trav-
eling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is
not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system,
always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing
lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly
and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of
the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear
view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured
by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked
by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to
alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert
is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal
is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on
that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time, both the visual
and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system,
the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is
also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP
state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or
audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when
the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the
previously stored mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation — If
Equipped
FCW With Mitigation Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with mitiga-
tion provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warn-
ings (within the instrument cluster display), and may apply
a haptic warning to warn the driver when it detects a poten-
tial frontal collision. The warnings are intended to provide
the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the
driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings
and may provide a haptic warning in the form of a brake jerk.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
If the driver does not take action based upon these progres-
sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of
active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that the driver
intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and
provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins
at a speed below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system
will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will
be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal
FCW activation and functionality.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse
of the system, after four Active Braking events within a
key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deac-
tivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deac-
tivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surround-
ings.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead
objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the
vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming
traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of
speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
Turning FCW On or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in the
control settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” in the Owner's Manual for further information.
• To turn the FCW system on, press the forward collision
button once.
• To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision
button once.
NOTE:
• When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front.
• When the FCW is “off” prevents the system from warning
the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front.
If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
• When FCW status is set to “Only Warning” prevents the
system from providing limited active braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately
in the event of a potential frontal collision.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
• When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking” this
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings
and it applies autonomous braking.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver
after ignition shutdown.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are program-
mable through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• Far
• When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Far” setting
and the system status is “Only Warning “, this allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible more distant
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings.
• More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warn-
ings may prefer this setting.
• Medium
• When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Only Warning”, this
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings.
• Near
• When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Near” setting
and the system status is “Only Warning”, this allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible closer colli-
sions with the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings.
• This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far”
and “Medium” settings, which allows for a more
dynamic driving experience.
• More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to avoid
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the
vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pres-
sure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven.
This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pres-
sure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until
the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold
placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approx-
imately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to
turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and
the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels,
and may contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels
to assure TPMS feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to
the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure
in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the
proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which
display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "Tire Low" message for a minimum of five seconds,
an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate
to XX" message. Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update, the pres-
sure values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will return to their original color, and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facil-
ities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare
tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size spare
tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key
cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will remain on and a
chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instru-
ment cluster will still display a different color pressure
value and an "Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “Service
Tire Pressure System” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and rein-
stall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or
non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automati-
cally. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Tire Fill Alert
Tire Fill Alert notifies the user when the placard tire pressure
is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature through use of the customer settings in the
radio.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
NOTE:
• Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire Fill
Alert system.
• The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an existing
TPM system fault is set to “active” or if the system is in
deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when there is over 1.5 psi (10 kPa)
of change in tire pressure. The ignition must be in the RUN
mode, with the transmission in PARK (P).
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire Fill
Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in
Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Operation:
• The horn will chirp to let the user know when to stop
filling the tire, when it reaches recommended pressure.
• The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over filled and
will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user
continues to inflate the tire.
• The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let out
to reach proper inflation level.
• The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
under-inflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies
that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing
winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will
chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale
Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off.
The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values in place
of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no
system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk
of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt
properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information) must be secured in the appropriate
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to
inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the
“Customer Assistance” section for customer service
contact information.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far
away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or
ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and
the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when
the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once
the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based
on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled
again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat
is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is prop-
erly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
(Continued)
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being
thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe
injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat
belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much
greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You
can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passen-
gers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver,
should always wear their seat belts whether or not an
air bag is also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another
in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person,
no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
(Continued)
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong
hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt
is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an autho-
rized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt
snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the
seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat
belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat,
and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped
with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as neces-
sary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
1 — Seat Belt Buckle
2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of
the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it
up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the
shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effec-
tiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the
vehicle is stationary.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions —
Fixed Rear Seat — If Equipped
The second row center seat belt may feature a seat belt with
a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to
detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored
out of the way in the left side trim panel for added conve-
nience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the
front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate from
its stowed position in the left rear side trim panel.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the
seat.
Shoulder Belt Routed Through The Seat Belt Guide Loop
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
3. Route the shoulder belt through the seat belt guide loop
on the top of the seatback near the inboard side of the left
head restraint.
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Mini-Latch Plate Buckled
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
(Continued)
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle
for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center
red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the
latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate into its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly
connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant,
the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint
and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the
webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder
belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing
seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is
not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
• When the center seat belt is in use, make sure that any
cargo in the cargo compartment is properly secured and
does not contact the seat belt webbing, and that there is
no slack in the center shoulder belt webbing.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat
Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s
body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt
is not long enough and only use in the recommended
seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt
Extender when not needed.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant
women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is
reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with preten-
sioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the
seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for
all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt place-
ment by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly
and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(Sliding Seat)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(Fixed Seat)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this
case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a "click."
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any
slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that
has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and
under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the
entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to
retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking
mode.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any
other seat belt function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase
the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a colli-
sion. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with
the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System Compo-
nents:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air
bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition
switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air
bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instru-
ment panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a
self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to
alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag
system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges
are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to “Warnings Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as
a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 218
SAFETY 219
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
3 — Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag/Passenger Knee Impact
Bolster
4 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 219
220 SAFETY
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger Occu-
pant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed to
provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appro-
priate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as determined
by the OCS.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 220
SAFETY 221
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection
by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good
indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from
an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags,
it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas
is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way
as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front
air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on
the instrument panel or steering wheel because any
such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or
attempt to open them manually. You may damage the
air bags and you could be injured because the air bags
may no longer be functional. The protective covers for
the air bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe
injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat
belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 221
222 SAFETY
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the
seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from
the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCM communicates this information to
the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on
occupant classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS esti-
mates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light
objects on it; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger,
including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child
restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint
Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a child in a
forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Reduced-power
deployment OR Full-power
deployment
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 222
SAFETY 223
(Continued)
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing
a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deploy-
ment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat
and never install a child restraint system, including a
rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC. The
ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably
on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the seat-
back in an upright position
Properly seated adult
Full-power deployment OR
reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat
Reduced-power
deployment
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 223
224 SAFETY
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly posi-
tioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight
on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another part
of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to
face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated
(e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 224
SAFETY 225
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and
center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front
passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 225
226 SAFETY
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 226
SAFETY 227
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel will
turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect
the operation of the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light does not come on, or stays on after you start the
vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or adult
in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that
is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight
input. This may result in serious injury or death in a
collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against the
seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center
of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the
floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes,
etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding
an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that
is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight
input, which may result in serious injury or death in a
collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger
seat may prevent the OCS from working properly,
which may result in serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Do not place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 227
228 SAFETY
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS compo-
nents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated
weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must
function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the
front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat
cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA
US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cush-
ions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific model
being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an after-
market seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be
modified or replaced with any part except those which are
approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver
and front passenger, and position the front occupants for
improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the
passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat
cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front passenger
if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified
vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 228
SAFETY 229
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air
Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering
column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
mounted in the instrument panel below the glove compart-
ment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced
protection during a frontal impact by working together with
the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduc-
tion potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with
such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where
the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 229
230 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) are
located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between
you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be
adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into
you, causing serious injury.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 230
SAFETY 231
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which could
alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle
for any reason.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 231
232 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt
pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not deploy
in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system deter-
mines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether
deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experi-
ences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air
Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children
must be properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against
the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air
Bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 232
SAFETY 233
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy the side
air bags and seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with
electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/
or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy
and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns
or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna-
sium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 233
234 SAFETY
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like parti-
cles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process
that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.
These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or
throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with
cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s
instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If
you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be
in place to protect you.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on
the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention
of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also,
have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 234
SAFETY 235
(Continued)
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition
switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed
from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instru-
ment panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 235
236 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not
function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including
removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If
it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 236
SAFETY 237
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times,
including babies and children. Every state in the United
States, and every Canadian province, requires that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child.
Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings
in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels
attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards.
You should also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/
parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-child-
safety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 237
238 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in a
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old
or who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in a
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of
the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have outgrown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of
the vehicle
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 238
SAFETY 239
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is
recommended for children from birth until they reach the
weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child
seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so
they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child
seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in
the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who are over two years old or who have outgrown the
rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-posi-
tioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly.
If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 239
240 SAFETY
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt
alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between
the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit peri-
odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of posi-
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not
move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it
can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the
child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat posi-
tion. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall
the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the
occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 240
SAFETY 241
tion. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat
to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight
of the Child +
Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 241
242 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchor-
ages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see
the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
Sliding Second Row LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 242
SAFETY 243
Fixed Second Row LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 243
244 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and
the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use
the seat belt and tether anchor instead
of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner LATCH
lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
Yes – Fixed 2nd Row Only
No – Sliding 2nd Row Seat
Fixed 2nd Row Seating: You can install
child restraints with flexible lower
anchors in the center position. The inner
anchorages are 18 inches (460 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the center
position.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 244
SAFETY 245
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If the
center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center
position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes
The head restraints can be removed in
every seating position if they interfere
with the installation of the child
restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting
To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 245
246 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Sliding 2nd Row Seat:
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found
at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat-
back. They are just visible when you lean into the
rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel
them if you run your finger along the gap between the seat-
back and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages — Sliding 2nd Row Seat
Fixed 2nd Row Seat:
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found
at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat-
back, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run
your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages — Fixed 2nd Row Seat
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 246
SAFETY 247
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Sliding 2nd Row Seat:
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear seat.
Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard position
behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and E are used
for the left outboard position behind the driver (3). Anchor-
ages C and D are used for the center seating position (2). Do
not
install a LATCH-compatible child restraint using anchor-
ages B and C. This is not a LATCH–compatible position in
your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you can fit three child restraints
in your vehicle, you must use the seat belt to install the center
child restraint and you must use the LATCH anchors for
position (3) behind the driver. You can use either the LATCH
anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing the third child
seat in position (1) behind the front passenger.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 247
248 SAFETY
(Continued)
Sliding Second Row Seat Lower Anchors
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3): Install
the child seats in the right and left outboard seating posi-
tions using lower anchorages A and B, and D and E. Do
not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the child seats do
not block the center seat belt webbing and buckle, the
center seat belt can be used to restraint an occupant or
child restraint in the center seating position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating
position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, C and D.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite
door, E. Do not use the remaining left outboard seating
position (3) for any occupant. The center child restraint
will block the seat belt buckle for this position.
WARNING!
• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint in the center seating position (2). Do not
install a LATCH-compatible child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH-compatible
position in your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2) will
block the seat belt buckle for the empty left outboard
seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this seat for
another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 248
SAFETY 249
Fixed 2nd Row Seat:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in
the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Fixed Second Row Seat LATCH Positions
• If you are installing three child restraints next to each
other, you must use the seat belt and the center tether
anchor for the center position. You must use the
LATCH anchors to install the child seat in position (3),
behind the driver. You may use either the LATCH
anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing the child
seat in position (1), behind the front passenger. Please
refer to “Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than
one child restraint. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other,
you must use the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that
seating position. For some second row seats, you may
need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint
to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top
tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat
Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and acci-
dentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installa-
tion, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should
not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into
a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the
retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on
ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
(Sliding Seat)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations (Fixed Seat)
ALR = Switchable Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR = Switchable Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward
facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child
restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed, if
the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes
The head restraints can be removed in
every seating position if they interfere
with the installation of the child
restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting
To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt path
of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position
to make room for the child seat. You may also move the
front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to
pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not
twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against
the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back
into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked,
you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the
retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating
position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether
strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 254
SAFETY 255
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install
the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may
need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that
seating position, move the child restraint to another position
in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the
strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle
is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not
possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Anchorage Locations
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any
location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved
for that seating position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of
approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,
or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make
sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening
between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles
in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if
they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor
condition, replace the seat belt.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear
doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls
to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at
high speed.
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After
the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an autho-
rized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the
blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the
air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer
for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake
or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on
a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
(Continued)
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat
interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the
vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the
driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING! (Continued)
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the posi-
tion of the floor mat and may cause interference with
the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed,
always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the
floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with
the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install
the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to
clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by
lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and
cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check
the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including
spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes
are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 260
261
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL (N)
or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 261
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained
without pumping or pushing the accelerator pedal.
Press the brake pedal and place the ignition in the START
mode and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails
to start within 10 seconds:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if both
pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure is detected on
both pedals simultaneously, a warning message will display
in the instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition in the START mode and release it as the
starter engages. The starter motor will automatically disen-
gage itself once engine is running. If the engine fails to start,
the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to
ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START mode and release it when
the engine starts.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 262
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
(Continued)
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place the
ignition in the OFF mode, wait 10 to 15 seconds to allow
the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park Starting
procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
If Engine Fails To Start
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 263
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps below
to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s
side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the heater
cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
hook-and-loop strap and properly stow away behind the
driver’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option.
If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available
from an authorized Mopar dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5
Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or
90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 264
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted
as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake System
(EPB) that offers simple operation, and some additional
features that make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the vehicle,
make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK (P).
You can engage the park brake in two ways:
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature in
the customer programmable features. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The park brake switch is located in the center console, behind
the shifter.
Electric Park Brake Switch
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 265
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages. Once
the park brake is fully engaged, the red BRAKE telltale light
in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply
the park brake, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement. The park brake can be applied even when
the ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE telltale light will
not illuminate, however, it can only be released when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN mode.
NOTE:
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch is held
for longer than 90 seconds in either the released or applied
position. The light will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake
will automatically engage whenever the transmission is
placed into PARK, when the ignition is turned OFF. If your
foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement while the park brake is engaging.
The park brake will release automatically when the ignition
is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R), the
driver seat belt is buckled.
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch must
be in the ON/RUN mode. Put your foot on the brake pedal,
then push the park brake switch down momentarily. You
may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may also
notice a small amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once
the park brake is fully disengaged, The BRAKE telltale light
in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch
will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 266
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
(Continued)
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury.
Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not rely on the parking brake to operate effectively
if the rear brakes have been immersed in water or mud.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 267
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion, main-
tain upward pressure on the electric park brake switch for as
long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE telltale light will
illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the
vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop
using the parking brake, when the vehicle reaches approxi-
mately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain
engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light flashing. In
this event, urgent service of the electric park brake system is
required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle
stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the
automatic transmission is placed in PARK, whenever the
ignition is turned “OFF”. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury.
Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be sure
the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving;
failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 268
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
disabled by customer selection through the customer
programmable features. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed by
pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the
transmission is placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake System
that will engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is
left unsecured while the ignition is in ON/RUN mode.
For automatic transmissions, the park brake will automati-
cally engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is at a standstill.
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or acceler-
ator pedal.
• The driver seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the Electric Park Brake Switch
while the driver door is open. Once manually bypassed,
SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF posi-
tion and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your autho-
rized dealer. You should only make repairs for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should
only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for you
or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear caliper
bore. With the electric park brake system, this can only be
done after retracting the Electric Park Brake actuator. Fortu-
nately, actuator retraction can be done easily by entering the
Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your
vehicle. This menu based system will guide you through the
steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to
perform rear brake service.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 269
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order to
be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The park brake must be unapplied.
• The transmission must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp will
flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the park brake system to normal
operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have
the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then
apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the igni-
tion is in the OFF mode) the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted move-
ment.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 270
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK (P).
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) posi-
tion. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the
transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the LOCK/OFF position.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it
is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a
location accessible to children), and do not leave the
ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 271
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake pedal
must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector
and move the selector rearward or forward. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK
(or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position
and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects
REVERSE while driving forward), the position indicator will
blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet the
needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software
and calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s driving
experience and fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and
driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very specific
driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift posi-
tions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Moving the gear selector into the MANUAL (-/+)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 272
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
position (beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick
mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the
current gear in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the MANUAL position will manually select the transmis-
sion gear.
Refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE,
or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it is prob-
ably in the MANUAL (AutoStick,(+/-)) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the trans-
mission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument
cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE
[D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially
important when the engine is cold.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 273
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmis-
sion into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution,
turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it
is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 274
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
(Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then
apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the igni-
tion is in the OFF mode), the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted move-
ment.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a
location accessible to children), and do not leave the
ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage
the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 275
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the gear
selector and firmly move the selector all the way forward
until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify
that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will
not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be started
in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 276
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control (refer
to "AutoStick" in this section for further information) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmis-
sion shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the
range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission
cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up
time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch, and
shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the transmission
fluid is warm (refer to the note within the “Torque Converter
Clutch” topic in this section). Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
SPORT — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift schedule
for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make
full use of available engine power.
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the
center console. Refer to "Selec-Terrain" in this section for
further information.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 277
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driving,
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing
and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside
the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and rearward.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-) trig-
gers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current
gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift up or
down when the driver moves the gear selector rearward (+)
or forward (-), except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when neces-
sary to prevent engine overspeed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display
the current gear.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 278
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
• The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST or
SECOND gear (depending on model) when coming to a
stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+)
the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or SECOND gear.
Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in snow or icy
conditions. Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to
select the desired gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-
speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a
vehicle speed.
• Avoid using Speed Control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Auto-
Stick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or
overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick posi-
tion at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some acceler-
ations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the trans-
mission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km]
of driving). Because the engine speed is higher when the
torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is
normal. The torque converter clutch will function normally
once the transmission is sufficiently warm.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 279
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If Equipped
This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive (4X4).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions, the
front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front wheels
begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the
rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the
greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.
1-Speed 4X4 Switch
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4x4) — If Equipped
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 280
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal
driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three
selectable mode positions:
• 4WD LOW
• REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
• NEUTRAL
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW range
position can be used to provide an additional gear reduction,
which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the
front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is intended for loose, slip-
pery road surfaces only. Driving in 4WD LOW on dry,
hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the normal
driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to over-
speed the engine, and do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do
not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. It
is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this chapter for further
information.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 281
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an
additional gear reduction which allows for increased torque
to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels while
providing maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for further informa-
tion on the various positions and their intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
Shifting Into 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition in the ON mode and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW”
button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the
shift is complete.
Selec-Terrain Switch
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages
both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 282
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will
flash from the instrument cluster display with instructions
on how to complete the requested shift.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition in the ON mode and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW”
button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will
flash from the instrument cluster display with instructions
on how to complete the requested shift. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align-
ment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method
is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the
vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD
system will not allow the shift.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
For the neutral shift procedure refer to “Recreational
Towing” in this chapter for further information.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground and
shift the transmission to PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages
both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 283
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the
recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light
behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating
shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
Neutral Button
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
13. Apply the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key kob.
Repeat steps 1-7 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System — If
Equipped
The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking rear
differential to provide better traction in the 4WD LOW posi-
tion. The “REAR LOCK” button is on the Selec-Terrain Knob.
Activating The Rear E-Locker
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following condi-
tions must be met:
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
2. The ignition in the ON mode and the engine running.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 284
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 mph (24 km/h).
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR LOCK button
once.
Rear Lock Button
Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System
To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following condi-
tions must be met:
1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK
indicator light on.
2. The ignition in the ON mode and the engine running.
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR LOCK
button once.
NOTE:
• It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back and
forth to complete engagement and disengagement of the
E-Locker.
• When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in the
instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button will
begin to flash. When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK
indicator lights will remain on.
• When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in
the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button will
begin to flash. When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK
indicator lights will remain off.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 285
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align-
ment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method
is for the vehicle to be rolling, below 15 mph (24 km/h),
while including right and left steering maneuvers to allow
for the clutch teeth to align.
• The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to
taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD LOW
shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will
flash from the instrument cluster display with instructions
on how to complete the requested shift.
SELEC-TERRAIN
Description
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control
systems, along with driver input, to provide the best perfor-
mance for all terrains.
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain offers the following modes:
• AUTO — Fully automatic, full time four-wheel drive oper-
ation can be used on and off road. Balances traction with a
seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and
acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles.
• SNOW — Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may use
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 286
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) during launches,
to minimize wheel slippage.
• SPORT — This mode alters the transmission's automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are
increased to make full use of available engine power.
NOTE:
SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is selected.
• SAND/MUD — Off-road calibration for use on low trac-
tion surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass. Driveline is
maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less
forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to
limit traction control management of throttle and wheel
spin.
• ROCK — Off-road calibration is only available in 4WD
LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved
steer-ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces. Use
for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
• ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
with the Off-Road package.
• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control
for steep downhill control.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” for
further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the elec-
tric steering system experiences a fault that reduces assist or
prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you will still have
the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 287
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING" OR "POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM”
message and a steering wheel icon are displayed on
the instrument cluster display screen, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely
the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to
“Warning Lights And Messages” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR-
MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster display screen, it indi-
cates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred,
which caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer
exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and
let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off.
Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these
conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically restart the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty battery,
starter, as well as other engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY, and if all other conditions are met,
can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
“Autostop” mode.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 288
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section.
Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the
zero position and the Stop/Start indicator light will illumi-
nate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will
be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety
and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed
information about the operation of the Stop/Start system
may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start
Screen. In the following situations, the engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
• Driver’s door is not closed
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold
• Battery charge is low
• The vehicle is on a steep grade
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable
cabin temperature has not been achieved
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed
• HVAC set to MAX A/C
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature
• The transmission is not in a forward or reverse gear
• Hood is open
• Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode (if equipped
with 4WD)
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure with
vehicle in DRIVE (D) position
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Accelerator pedal input
• Engine temp too high
• 5 mph threshold not achieved from previous AUTOSTOP
• Steering angle beyond threshold
• ACC is on and speed is set
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 289
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times
without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/START
READY state under more extreme conditions of the items
listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake
pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The trans-
mission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automat-
ically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission gear selector is moved out of DRIVE,
except in the PARK position
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted
• Battery voltage drops too low
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applica-
tions)
• Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
• A Stop/Start system error occurs
• 4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode (if equipped
with 4WD)
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric Park
Brake While In Autostop Mode:
• The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released
• The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled
• The engine hood has been opened
• A Stop/Start system error occurs
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off, the
engine may require a manual restart and the electric park
brake may require a manual release (depress brake pedal
and push Electric Park Brake switch).
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 290
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Warning Lights And
Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the Stop/Start
system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back ON.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank).
The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the system
will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START
SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 291
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
• Do not place the gear selector in NEUTRAL (N) when
Speed Control is activated. Doing so will disengage the
system.
• In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control
system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed
control functions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control system can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
1 — On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go
too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 292
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on
level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is dependent
on the chosen speed unit of US (mph) or Metric (km/h):
US Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 293
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is dependent
on the chosen speed unit of US (mph) or Metric (km/h):
US Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal
is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to OFF,
erases the set speed from memory.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 294
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving conve-
nience provided by cruise control while traveling on high-
ways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed Control func-
tion performs differently. Please refer to the proper section
within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply
limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the original
set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appro-
priate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising at
a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to
preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Speed Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always
confirm which mode is selected.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 295
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be atten-
tive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle
speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most impor-
tantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight
distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving within
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be cancelled.
• You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 296
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the
vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low
• When you apply the brakes
• When the parking brake is applied
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK (P),
REVERSE (R) or NEUTRAL (N)
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 297
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range
• When the brakes are overheated
• When the driver door is open at low speed
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speed
• ESC Full-Off Mode is active
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (+)
button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed.
If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 298
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system
will turn off and the instrument cluster display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied
• The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE (D) position
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System
(ESC/TCS) activates
• The vehicle parking brake is applied
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds
• Driver door is opened at low speeds
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated)
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 299
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed.
• The ignition is cycled OFF.
• Four-Wheel Drive Low is engaged
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The
instrument cluster display will show the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing
the SET (+) button.
The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen
speed unit of US (mph) or Metric (km/h):
US Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too
high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions
could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 300
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing
the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependent on the chosen
speed unit of US (mph) or Metric (km/h):
US Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-)
buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will auto-
matically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop when
following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a
target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds the driver
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 301
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing
set speed.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill
and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will
cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calcu-
lates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting appears in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 302
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 303
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting —
Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed,
the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting —
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed,
the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster display will show the “Sensed
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system will adjust the
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC
Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if neces-
sary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 304
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) engaged
and following a vehicle, the system will provide an addi-
tional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered
when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be
active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any
driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver will
either have to push the RES button, or press the accelerator
to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill for
approximately three consecutive minutes, the parking brake
system will be activated and the ACC system will be
cancelled.
While ACC with stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC with stop system will cancel and the brakes
will ramp-out. Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 305
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located in
the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not
been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will appear in the instrument
cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following messages:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last display
selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 306
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or
ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is
still available. For additional information refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor
lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could
cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a
sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to
a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc-
tion.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer
present, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise
Control Off” state and will resume function by simply reac-
tivating it.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 307
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display, and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow
or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt,
or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will read “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the
system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the back
side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruc-
tion, have the windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be
an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-
able under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later,
following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 308
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues.
In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The
driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accel-
erate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 309
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability
reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is
out of the curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your
lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic condi-
tions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may
be limited.
ACC Hill Example
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 310
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 311
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehi-
cles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle
ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for
cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 312
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator.
Speed Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC on and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
off. Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message
(CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/km/h) will appear indi-
cating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the
speed control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is dependent
on the speed of US (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
US Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 313
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown is dependent
on the speed of US (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
US Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button
is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied
• The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System
(ESC/TCS) activates
• The vehicle parking brake is applied
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated)
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 314
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed.
• The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
• Four-Wheel Drive Low is engaged
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically
applied and released when performing a reverse parking
maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
information on turning Rear Braking Assist on or off.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function by
pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via Park-
Sense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic
brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in 4LO.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a faulted
condition detected with the ParkSense Park Assist system
or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if the
vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding with
a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/disabled
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state for
the automatic braking function through ignition cycles.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 315
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles
while in REVERSE (R) gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceler-
ation and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's
movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this
section for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
cycled to ON/RUN.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector posi-
tion, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above.
When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed,
a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display
indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the
sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Display
The ParkSense display is always shown in the instrument
cluster display as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (R).
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear
region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change
from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 316
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Single 1/2 Second Tone Slow Tone
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 317
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone Fast Tone
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 318
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The
following chart shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater
than79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less
than12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 319
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the
Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect
System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to "Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate
the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 320
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch located below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will
be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be
on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition,
the instrument cluster display will display the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, Park-
Sense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction
and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized
dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 321
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt
and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating prop-
erly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster will
display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again,
even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position
and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster display
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The Park-
Sense system might not detect an obstacle behind the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off
if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinter-
preting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message to be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An open lift-
gate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 322
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). If your
vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, the
vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released
when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system
detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function by
pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via Park-
Sense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic
brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in 4LO.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a faulted
condition detected with the ParkSense Park Assist system
or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if the
vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding with
a detected obstacle.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is discon-
nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver
looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 323
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/disabled
from the Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state for
the automatic braking function through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles
when backing up in REVERSE (R) gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceler-
ation and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's
movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limita-
tions of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
mately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display warning will appear in
the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the
sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist will have six
sensors in the rear fascia/bumper.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 324
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/bumper,
monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the
sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from
the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE (D) and an obstacle has been detected.
ParkSense On
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions based
on the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the
display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear
region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change
from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 325
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Single 1/2 Second Tone Slow Tone
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 326
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Slow Tone Fast Tone
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 327
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument
cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a contin-
uous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert oper-
ation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 328
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 329
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle
has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal
is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate
the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch located below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is moved
to the DRIVE position, no warning message will be
displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 330
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be
on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a
faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will display
a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop
up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle
graphic will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either
the front or rear sensor location depending on where the
fault is detected. The system will continue to provide arc
alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc
alerts will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is
detected within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle
graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If
the message continues to appear see your authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see your
authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 331
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, ice,
mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system oper-
ating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster will
display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again,
even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position
and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster will
display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The Park-
Sense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in
front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indi-
cation that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off
if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinter-
preting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 332
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to assist
the driver during Parallel, Perpendicular, and Parallel Park
Exit maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the
steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes.
Depending on the driver's parking maneuver selection, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneu-
vering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side), as
well as exiting a parallel parking space.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and must
intervene as required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches
the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is discon-
nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver
looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 333
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
the driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environ-
mental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealer must have at least 30 miles
(48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately.
This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to
improve the performance of the feature. The system will
also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration
to account for differences such as over or under inflated
tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled and
disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off auto-
matically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering guid-
ance into the parking space
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch
• Driver's door is opened
• Rear liftgate is opened
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking System
intervention
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R). If the maneuver cannot be completed
within the maximum amount of shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 334
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following condi-
tions are present:
• Gear position is in DRIVE.
• Ignition is in the RUN position.
• ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
• Driver's door is closed.
• Rear liftgate is closed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph (25 km/h),
the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to slow
down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph
(30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver must then reacti-
vate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch.
• Vehicle not in 4LO mode (if equipped).
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear
fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will turn
off if any of the above conditions are not present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled the
“Active ParkSense Searching - Press or to Switch
Maneuver” message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. You may switch to perpendicular parking or
Parallel Park Exit if you desire. The arrow buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel can be used to switch parking
maneuvers.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn
signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/clear
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 335
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into
the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should drive
as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the type of
maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
Active ParkSense Searching
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 336
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to stop
the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from the
steering wheel.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE (R) position.
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 337
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 338
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
NOTE:
• It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and acceler-
ator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a warning
to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow
down. The driver is then responsible for completing the
maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward move-
ment, the system will instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop the
vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be
prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or
when driver intervention is required.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 339
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE posi-
tion, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering
to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 340
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward move-
ment, the system will instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop the
vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be
prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or
when driver intervention is required.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 341
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE posi-
tion.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 342
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. The "Active
ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position" message will
be momentarily displayed. When the maneuver is complete,
the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking
position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position,
they should shift to PARK.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 343
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press or to Switch
Maneuver” message will show in the instrument cluster
display. The arrow buttons on the left side of the steering
wheel can be used to switch parking maneuvers. You may
switch to parallel parking, or Parallel Park Exit, if you desire.
Refer to “Exiting The Parking Space” in this section for more
information.
Active ParkSense Searching Display
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn
signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/clear
of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into
the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should drive
as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the type of
maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 344
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking
sequence.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to stop
the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from the
steering wheel.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 345
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE (R) position.
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 346
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
NOTE:
• It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and acceler-
ator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a warning
to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow
down. The driver is then responsible for completing the
maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 347
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward move-
ment, the system will instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop the
vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be
prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or
when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 348
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE posi-
tion, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering
to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 349
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward move-
ment, the system will instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop the
vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be
prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or
when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE posi-
tion.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 350
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 351
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed
to check the vehicle's parking position. If the driver is satis-
fied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. The
"Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position"
message will be momentarily displayed.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, look
behind and in front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You
are responsible for safety and must continue to pay
attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder
when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 352
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Exiting The Parking Space
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpendicular
parking space, but only exiting parallel parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, push the Active ParkSense hard
switch once. After selection, the system activates and warns
the driver on the instrument panel display about the opera-
tions that have to be carried out to perform the maneuver
correctly.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the direction indicators to choose the direction that you
want to perform the maneuver. Use the right arrow indicator
to perform the maneuver to the right side and use the left
arrow indicator to perform the maneuver to the left.
To Exit Space Use Turn Signal And Shift To Reverse —
Press Left Or Right To Switch Maneuver
During the maneuver, the system asks to shift to REVERSE,
select the direction indicator in the direction you want to exit.
Let go of the steering wheel, and press the dedicated pedals
while the system handles the steering automatically for
exiting the parking space. If the driver continues to carry out
a voluntary or involuntary action on the steering wheel
during the exit maneuver (touching or holding the steering
wheel to prevent its movement), the maneuver will be inter-
rupted.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 353
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check Surroundings — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 354
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Check Surroundings — Move Backward Check Surroundings — Stop
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 355
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 356
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — Stop
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 357
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 358
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the display shows
the message of a completed maneuver. At the end of the
maneuver, the system gives back the vehicle control to the
driver.
Active ParkSense Complete Check Surroundings
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense
system uses a forward looking camera to detect lane mark-
ings and measure vehicle position within the lane bound-
aries.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 359
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
When both lane markings are detected and the driver unin-
tentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of
torque applied to the steering wheel, as well as a visual
warning in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic
(torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense
system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the steering
wheel and provide an audible and visual warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not
return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is “off”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the Lane-
Sense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On”
message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
LaneSense On Message
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 360
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense button
once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state, on or
off, from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed
to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual warn-
ings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line
remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 361
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a
right lane departure when only the right lane marking has
been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn from
gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings
have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn solid white.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 362
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line
remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a
right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 363
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual warn-
ings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from yellow to gray, the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow To Gray Thick Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a
right lane departure when only the right lane marking has
been detected.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 364
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn from
gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings
have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel
in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line
remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 365
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a
right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (early/
late) that you can configure through the Uconnect system
screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph (60 km/h)
and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (anti-lock brakes, trac-
tion control system, electronic stability control, forward
collision warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is
put into REVERSE (R). The image will be displayed in the
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 366
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn the Rear View
Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the Ucon-
nect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, the
vehicle’s ignition is switched to the OFF position, or the
touchscreen button “X” to disable the display of the Rear
View Camera is pressed.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera was manually activated, the timer
will start again only after the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously
until deactivated via the touchscreen button “X”, the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
• The touchscreen button “X” to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the vehicle is
not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup
path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center
line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with
parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 367
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the
camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a
soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed at the filler
pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically upon
insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle. The Capless Fuel
System is designed so that it prevents the filling of an incor-
rect type of fuel.
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the
driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 368
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the rear edge of
the fuel door.
Fuel Door
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe
seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the nozzle
opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
Fuel Filler
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
5. Wait 10 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to allow
fuel to drain from nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 369
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper door. A funnel is
provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency refu-
eling with a gas can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
Fuel Funnel
5. Remove the funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being
filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations and
may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 370
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed
to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passen-
gers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum
permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must
be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each
axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs,
tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability
does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 371
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the
actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be
equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all
loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of
the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle
may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has
been exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or
rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limita-
tions are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 372
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this infor-
mation to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the total allow-
able weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers,
cargo, and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so
that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables, and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
"loaded and ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 373
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum
capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over
the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Certification
Label” which is in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the
load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction asso-
ciated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) recog-
nizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other
connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the
most popular on the market today and they are commonly
used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result
if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 374
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition
of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway
caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively
to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/
loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
requirements.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow,
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking perfor-
mance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 375
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission Model Frontal Area
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.0L Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
2.0L Automatic With
Trailer Tow Package
FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 4,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 400 lbs (181 kg)
2.4L Automatic With
Or Without Trailer
Tow Package
FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
3.2L Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
3.2L Automatic With
Trailer Tow Package
FWD or 4WD 39.44 sq ft (3.66 sq m) 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never
exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 376
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your
bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight on
the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in
or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to
the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed
options or dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And
Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle
and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the
cause of many trailer collisions.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 377
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
that it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can
occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You
could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK.
Always block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
• GVWR
• GTW
• GAWR
• Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not
make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 378
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare
tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire inflation
procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Main-
tenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum
system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could
cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake
controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded,
it should have its own brakes and they should be of
adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort,
and longer stopping distances.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 379
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but
you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the
following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into
vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 380
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE (D) range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting
does occur while in DRIVE, use the AutoStick shift control to
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest
gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids
frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to
avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher
gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions
allow.
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 381
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you
can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
4X4 Models
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
1-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
2-Speed Power Transfer
Unit
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions:
• Transmission in PARK
• Power transfer unit in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 382
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will
result.
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place transmission in PARK.
Turn the engine OFF.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the parking brake.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and release
the brake pedal.
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway
Safety offices for additional details.
4X4 Models
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
1-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
2-Speed Power Transfer
Unit
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 383
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not
have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer unit.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
The power transfer unit must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
4WD selector switch. Shifts into and out of NEUTRAL (N) can
take place with the selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the front wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing with only
one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will
cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the power
transfer unit.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the power transfer unit is fully in
NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 384
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to shift the 4WD system into
NEUTRAL.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground, and
shift the transmission to PARK (P).
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages
both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the
power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 385
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the
recessed NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for four seconds. The light behind the N symbol
will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop
blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N)
is complete.
Neutral Button
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Apply the parking brake.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE (R).
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow
bar.
16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
17. Press and hold the brake pedal.
18. Release the parking brake.
19. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and release
the brake pedal.
NOTE:
• When towing this vehicle behind another vehicle, the
parking brake must be released.
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 386
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button or are no longer met during the shift, then the
NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button
is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be oper-
able. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator lights will be
on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected
to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the
recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for one second.
Neutral Button
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated by
the selector switch.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 387
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When shifting the power transfer unit out of NEUTRAL (N),
the engine should remain off to avoid gear clash.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
16. Re-enable the Auto Park Brake feature, if desired.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to
be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the
NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button
is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be oper-
able. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator lights will be
on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design charac-
teristics give them a higher center of gravity than conven-
tional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view
of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are
not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conven-
tional passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehi-
cles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 388
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
Off-Road Driving Tips
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power (refer to “All Wheel Drive and
Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further
details). This range should be limited to extreme situations
such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional low
speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
50 mph (80 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW
range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
there are a number of precautions that must be considered
before entering the water:
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent
damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try
to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and loca-
tion of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with caution
and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph
(8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow
rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water, avoid
depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water can
erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream of your
entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 16 inches (40.5 cm),
and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of water is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water deeper
than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to
minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm)
of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h).
Always check water depth before entering as a precaution,
and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 389
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer
Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to ensure they have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky,
foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as
possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional control
at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low gear and
shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain mode, using
4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Opera-
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and
traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions at
the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use first
gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
NOTE:
Brakes should be applied at increased slippage, but before
coming to a stop to avoid digging into the loose surface and
rendering the operator of the vehicle stuck/immobile.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep
hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brakes. Once stopped, shift to REVERSE. Back
slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of
the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are
required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and
avoid locking or skidding the tires.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 390
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive
straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill,
ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the
front wheels slowly left and right. This may provide a fresh
“bite” into the surface and may provide traction to complete
the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System
to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent Control if
equipped (refer to "Safety Features" in “Safety” for further
information). Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all
four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This
will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can
cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check
tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust
system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the
chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension.
Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values spec-
ified in the Service Manual.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn
around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the
vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE
gear carefully. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL
using only the brake.
5
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 391
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
• Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance. Freeing the
wheels of impacted material will likely rectify imbalance
condition.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking system may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking
performance. Full braking power may not be available to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the braking
components as soon as possible.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 392
393
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower
center area of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle
is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motor-
ists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers may wear
down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
1 — SOS Button
2 — Power Button
3 — ASSIST Button
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 393
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian™.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle
issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a
10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to
a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancel-
lation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS
Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 394
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395
(Continued)
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS oper-
ator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS oper-
ator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional help is needed.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS Call
system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be
able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the SOS operator
opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
system, the operator should be able to speak with you or
other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the
vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt to
remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS
operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important
vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or
smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or loca-
tion), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency
Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 395
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected,
and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable
network and GPS antennas. You could prevent oper-
able network and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.
An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate
an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause
the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR
VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN
ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS
AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could
cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not there to
help protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 396
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to,
the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active
• The ignition is in the OFF position
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected
during a vehicle crash
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
• Operator error by the SOS operator
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
• Weather
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror
light is illuminated, have your authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the
Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your autho-
rized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control
system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 397
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emer-
gency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is required for the
SOS Call system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 398
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Back-up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver at the top of the
bulb access cover to pry the lower trim panel from the lift-
gate.
3. Once the access panel is loose, pull it back exposing the
insulation.
4. Move insulation towards center of vehicle to expose the
back of liftgate lamp.
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Cargo Lamp TL212–2
Overhead Console Lamp PLW214–2A
Reading Lamp WL212–2
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam
Headlamps
LED (Serviced at an
authorized dealer)
Front Park/Daytime
Running Lamps
LED (Serviced at an
authorized dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamps
LED (Serviced at an
authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps
LED (Serviced at an
authorized dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps
LED (Serviced at an
authorized dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamps
LED (Serviced at an
authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
LED (Serviced at an
authorized dealer)
Back-Up Lamps W21W
License Plate Lamp
LED (Serviced at an
authorized dealer)
Bulb Name Bulb Number
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 399
400 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
8. Move insulation back to original position.
9. Close the liftgate.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the
original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse
inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury,
fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off and/
or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized
dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag
system, braking system), power unit systems (engine
system, transmission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 400
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge
fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies each
component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Center
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse With A Good/Functional Fuse Element.
3 — Blade Fuse With A Bad / Not Functional Fuse Element (Blown
Fuse).
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 15 Amp Blue –
Powertrain Control Mod - PCM (Diesel) / Surge Solenoid
Purge Valve (Gas) – If Equipped
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 401
402 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F08 25 Amp Clear –
Fuel Injectors (Gas), ECM (Gas), PCM/Fuel Injectors
(Diesel)
F09
15 Amp Blue (Gas)
10 Amp Red
(Diesel)
–
Coolant Pump (Gas) – If Equipped
UREA Coolant Pump/PCM (Diesel) – If Equipped
F10 20 Amp Yellow – Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
F11 – – Not Used
F12 10 Amp Red – Supply And Purging Pump (Diesel)
F13 10 Amp Red –
Voltage Stability Mod (VSM)/Powertrain Control Mod
(PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM)
F14 10 Amp Red –
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Power Take-Off Unit
(PTU)/Electric Park Brake (EPB)/RDM/Brake System
Module (BSM) – If Equipped/Brake Pedal Switch/Back Up
Lamp Switch (Diesel)
F15 – – Not Used
F16 20 Amp Yellow – Ign Coils / Additional Diesel Content
F17 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump (GAS GMET4/V6 Engines Only)
F18 – – Not Used
F19 – 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
F20 10 Amp Red – A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 – – Not Used
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 402
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 403
F22 5 Amp Tan – Radiator Fan (PWM) Enable
F23 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #2
F24 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Wiper
F25B 20 Amp Yellow – FT/RR Washer
F26 – 30 Amp Pink Fuel Heater (Diesel)
F27 – – Not Used
F28 15 Amp Blue – Transmission Control Module (TCM/Shifter)
F29 – – Not Used
F30 10 Amp Red –
Engine Control Module (ECM)/(EPS)/Fuel Pump Relay
Feed/(PCM)/Gas Particulate Filter (GPF)
F31 – – Not Used
F32 – – Not Used
F33
– – Not Used
F34 – – Not Used
F35 – – Not Used
F36 – – Not Used
F37 – – Not Used
F38 – 60 Amp Yellow Glow Plugs (Diesel)
F39 – 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 403
404 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F40 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Park Light – If Equipped
F41 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #1
F42 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Module – If Equipped
F43 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump Motor
F44
–
30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
F45 – 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module (PDM) – If Equipped
F46 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof Control Module - If Equipped
F47 – – Not Used
F48 – 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module
F49 – 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115V/220V A/C)
F50 – 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate Module
F51 – – Not Used
F52 – 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers
F53 – 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module (BSM) - ECU And Valves
F54 – 30 Amp Pink Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 3
F55 10 Amp Red
–
Blind Spot Sensors/Rearview Camera, Rear Heated Seat
Switch
F56 15 Amp Blue –
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/Electric
Steering Column Lock (ESCL), Dual USB Port – RR Console
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 404
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 405
F57 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lights - If Equipped
F58 10 Amp Red – Occupant Classification Module/VSM/TT Mod/ESCL
F59 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) – If Equipped
F60 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet – Center Console
F61 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn Lights - If Equipped
F62 20 Amp Yellow – Windshield De-Icer – If Equipped
F63 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated/Ventilated Seats - If Equipped
F64 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Heated Seats – If Equipped
F65 10 Amp Red –
In Vehicle Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/Driver
Assist System Module (DASM)/Park Assist (PAM)
F66 15 Amp Blue –
HVAC (ECC)/Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Gateway
Module
F67 – – Not Used
F68 – – Not Used
F69 10 Amp Red –
Transfer Case Switch (TSBM)/Active Grill Shutter (AGS) –
If Equipped With Gas Engine
F70 5 Amp Tan – Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F71 – – Not Used
F72 10 Amp Red – Heated Mirrors (Gas) / PM Sensor (Diesel)
F73 – 20 Amp Blue NOX Sensor #1 & #2 / Trailer Tow Backup (NAFTA & Gas)
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 405
406 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F74 – 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster (EBL)
F75 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter – If Equipped
F76 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Differential Module (RDM) - If Equipped
F77 10 Amp Red – Hands Free Module, Brake Pedal Switch
F78 10 Amp Red – Diagnostic Port / Digital TV / TBM
F79 10 Amp Red –
Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Electric Park Brake (EPB)
SW/CD Mod/Steering Control Mod (SCCM)/HVAC/
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
F80 20 Amp Yellow – Radio
F81 – – Customer Selectable Location For F91 Power Outlet Feed
F82 5 Amp Tan – Cybersecurity Gateway Module
F83 –
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
Engine Controller Module (Gas)
SCU Module (Diesel)
F84 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left
F85 15 Amp Blue – (CSWM) Heated Steering Wheel
F86 20 Amp Yellow – Horns
F87 – – Not Used
F88 10 Amp Red – Seat Belt Reminder (SBR)/Smart Camera
F89 15 Amp Blue – Auto Headlamp Leveling (If Equipped) / Headlamp
F90 – – Not Used
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 406
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 407
* 30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
F91 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet Rear – If Equipped – Customer Selectable
F92 – – Not Used
F93 – 40 Amp Green Brake System Module (BSM) – Pump Motor
F94 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right
F95 10 Amp Red –
Sunroof Module / Rain Sensor Module (LRSM) /
Electrochromatic Mirror Module (ECMM) / Dual USB Port
(Rear)/ Power Outlet Console Illumination / Digital TV
F96 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag)
F97 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag)
F98 25 Amp Clear – Audio Amplifier/ANC
F99 – – Not Used
F100 – – Not Used
Circuit Breakers
CB1 30 Amp * Power Seat (Driver)
CB2 30 Amp * Power Seat (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp Power Window
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 407
408 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the Body Control
Module (BCM) in the passenger compartment on the left side
dash panel under the instrument panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Yellow Deadbolt All Unlock
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 25 Amp Clear Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right – If Equipped
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Wireless Charging Pad – If Equipped
F51 7.5 Amp Brown Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors – If Equipped
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89 10 Amp Red Door Locks – Driver Unlock
F91 7.5 Amp Brown Left Front Fog Lamp (Low And High Line)
F92 7.5 Amp Brown Right Front Fog Lamp (High Line)
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 408
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 409
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks, and spare tire are stowed under the
load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the load floor handle, then lift access cover to locate
jack and tools.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the hook from the stowed position on the back
side of the load floor and place the hook over the top body
flange and weather seal. This will hold the load floor up
while obtaining the jack and spare tire.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a
jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 409
410 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
5. Remove the chocks.
6. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove the wrench
from the jack assembly.
Jack And Tool Assembly
NOTE:
The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two
attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded, the
tension between the two attachment points holds the jack
handle in place.
7. Remove the spare tire.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 410
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 411
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P) (automatic trans-
mission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel.
Wheel Chocks
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 411
412 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
Jacking Instructions
Jack Warning Label
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 412
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 413
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, wheel chocks, and wheel bolt
wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap
covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry
the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the
flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage
the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill clad-
ding.
Jacking Locations
Front Lifting Point
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 413
414 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 414
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 415
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and
thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting
the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center
cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited Use Spare”
under “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for addi-
tional warnings, cautions, and information about the spare
tire, its use, and operation.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the wheel
bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing
outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire
is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered to the ground. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 415
416 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in “Tech-
nical Specifications” for the proper lug bolt torque.
Assembled Jack
12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and flat tire.
Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 416
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 417
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end of
the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service station.
Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in
“Technical Specifications” for the proper lug bolt torque.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel chocks.
Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow
it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the
means provided. Release the parking brake before
driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly
seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with a Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit
can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 417
418 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind
the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
NOTE:
Tire service kit may vary, depending on trim level.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 418
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 419
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
• Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose when selecting this mode.
• Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)
when selecting this mode.
• Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once to turn on
the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
• Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air pres-
sure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
1 — Power Button
2 — Mode Select Knob
3 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
6 — Sealant Bottle Release Button
7 — Power Plug
8 — Pressure Gauge
9 — Deflation Button
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 419
420 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle and Sealant
Hose prior to the expiration date (printed at the upper
right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum
operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing A Tire With Tire
Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle And Hose Replace-
ment” in this section for further information.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
• The Sealant Bottle and Sealant Hose are a one tire applica-
tion use and need to be replaced after each use. Always
replace these components immediately at your original
equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the
vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the
Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air
pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable
items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose and make
sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air Mode when
inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punc-
tures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of
your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 420
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 421
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated
tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will
allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses and to reach the valve
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or
absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case
of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of chil-
dren. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 421
422 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting
the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air
pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in
the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the
tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service
Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake
engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white fluid)
will flow from the Sealant Bottle through the Sealant Hose
and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 seconds
through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem. Make
sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant
Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 422
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 423
is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push
the Power Button to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob is on Air Mode and the pump is
operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose only,
not the Sealant Hose.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through the hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose,
the Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly from approx-
imately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when
the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately
after the Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue to operate the
pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar (recom-
mended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at
the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure
within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
Never operate the compressor for longer than 20 minutes.
Risk of Overheating.
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button to
reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pres-
sure before continuing.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 423
424 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose,
and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage loca-
tion. Quickly proceed to “Drive Vehicle.”
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. “Refer to “(A) Whenever You
Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section, before
continuing.”
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose can result in sealant contacting your
skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also
result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit
components which may cause permanent damage to
the kit.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 424
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 425
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (black in color) and screw the
fitting at the end of hose onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button
to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation
pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, rein-
stall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt
outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service
center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle and Sealant Hose assembly at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. “Refer to
“Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement” in this section for
further information.”
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer
or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire
Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (clear in color).
2. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle release button
at the lower right hand corner of the kit.
3. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release button, then pull
out the bottle holding the button.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 425
426 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle in the housing so that the
Sealant Hose aligns with the hose slot in the front of the
housing. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release button,
then push the bottle into the housing by holding the
button. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place. Release the button.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose and return the hose to its storage area
(located on top of the housing).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts
or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 426
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 427
(Continued)
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
Positive Battery Post
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK (P) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the
vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the parking
brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands
and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin
or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from
the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury could
result.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 427
428 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable
to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery,
let the engine idle for a few minutes, and then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or
the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 428
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 429
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system inspected
at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The fuel filling procedure for in case of an emergency is
described in the “Emergency Gas Can Refueling” procedure.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel. If refueling
is necessary, while using an approved gas can, please insert
the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 429
430 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the poten-
tial for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate
action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL(N), but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending
overheat condition:
• If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine
cooling system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK (P) position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate the
shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center console,
and raise it up to access the gear selector mechanism.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant
(antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or
hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 430
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 431
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the
gear selector override access hole (at the right front corner
of the gear selector assembly), and push and hold the
override release lever down.
Override Access Hole
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N) position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL (N).
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels.
Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R), while
gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. When-
ever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine.
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 431
432 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
NOTE:
Push the “ESC OFF” switch (if necessary), to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle
has been freed, push the “ESC OFF” switch again to restore
“ESC On” mode.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4
vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are stuck and
do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what
the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine
to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least
one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This
will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch
or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free
a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may
lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also
damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
ring).
CAUTION! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 432
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 433
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equip-
ment designed for this purpose, following equipment manu-
facturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural
members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
4X4 MODELS
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF
The Ground
FWD MODELS
1–SPEED
POWER
TRANSFER
UNIT
2–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
Flat Tow NONE
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
See instructions under “Recreational Towing”
in “Starting And Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Power Transfer Unit in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Rear
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL
BEST
METHOD
OK BEST METHOD
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 433
434 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer program-
mable features in the Uconnect Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical failure
when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a
wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park Brake
whenever the driver's door is opened (if the ignition is ON,
transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If
you are towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN
mode, you must manually disable the Electric Park Brake
each time the driver's door is opened, by pressing the brake
pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK so
that the vehicle can be moved.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF of the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels OFF of the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains
released, while being towed. The Electric Park Brake does
not need to be released, if all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle
damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage
to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 434
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 435
(Continued)
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels OFF
the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or
with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a
towing dolly.
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit
The manufacturer recommends towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or
with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a
towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power Transfer
Unit is operable, vehicles with a 2–speed Power Transfer
Unit may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), under the following conditions:
• The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N).
• The transmission must be in PARK (P).
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage
to the transmission or power transfer unit will occur if
a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 435
436 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Recovery Strap — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap.
Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow straps, chains,
or winch cables.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage
to the transmission or power transfer unit will occur if
a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Recovery straps should only be used in emergencies to
rescue stranded vehicles. Only use Recovery straps on
vehicles that fit within the recommended GVW of your
recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps to OE
recommended anchor points or emergency towing
anchor points. Never attach to tow ball or vehicle tie
down point, these are not designed for this purpose.
Never attach to vehicle steering, drive train, or any other
suspension components. NEVER pull a strap over sharp
edges or abrasive surfaces that can damage the recovery
strap. NEVER use a damaged strap, it has reduced
strength. DO NOT attempt to repair straps. ONLY
persons involved in the recovery should be in either
vehicle. No passengers. Anyone inside the vehicles can
be struck by strap recoil, causing serious injury. MOVE
bystanders at least 40 ft (12.2 m) from the recovery area
when using the recovery strap.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 436
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 437
Using Recovery Strap
1. Review all warnings and instructions first.
2. Position the recovery vehicle.
3. Connect the recovery strap.
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.
5. Clear the danger zone.
6. Safely and slowly start pulling.
7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both vehicles are
secure and parked.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information on the Enhanced Accident Response
System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 437
438
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indi-
cator system. The oil change indicator system will remind
you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled main-
tenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indi-
cator message will illuminate. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, or extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early
as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to
the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed
10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine
run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run
or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is consid-
ered Severe Duty.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 438
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
At Every Fuel Stop:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the following required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires
NOTE:
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
• Inspect the CV/Universal joints
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 439
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary.
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs — 2.0L Engine
1
X X
Replace spark plugs — 2.4L & 3.2L Engine
1
X
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 440
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is consid-
ered Heavy Duty.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the
knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an
accident.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 441
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 442
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
2.4L Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 443
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.2L Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery
2 — Oil Filter Access Cover 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 9 — Engine Oil Fill
5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 444
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up
engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range.
• Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN and
the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch mark-
ings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high
end of the range marking.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield and rear window washers share the same
fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front of
the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in
the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer
fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the
wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 445
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact
your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery
when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on
skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of
water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or
sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery
that the positive cable is attached to the positive post
and the negative cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-)
and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corro-
sion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 446
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any proce-
dure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Refer to “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed
10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine
run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run
or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recom-
mends engine oils that are API SN PLUS certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-13340. An
equivalent full synthetic engine oil can be used if it meets
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended. Precautions have been
taken to safeguard all parts and connections however,
the pressures generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress cannot be
guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 447
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
API SN PLUS Certification. If SN PLUS or equivalent oil is
unavailable then please contact your local dealership for
recommendation.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L & 3.2L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recom-
mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L Engine
Mopar API SN PLUS Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic
Engine Oil which meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-13340 is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illus-
tration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended SN PLUS or equivalent
oil can cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 448
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.2L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell
Helix is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information
on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil
filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscrimi-
nately discarded, can present a problem to the environment.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 449
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Contact an authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil
filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable
oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar
engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recom-
mended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” maintenance
interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters
are a high quality filter and are recommended.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the
air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 450
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you
find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change your
air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner cover.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. If equipped with a 2.0L remove the screws from the air
cleaner cover and disconnect the electrical sensor.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Screws
1 — Screws
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 451
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present
before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner cover to the
housing assembly and reconnect the electrical connector
(if equipped).
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
1— Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with
the vehicle running.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 452
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run
across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered
normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any
belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also
have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords
or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct position
on pulley)
• Belt broken
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is installed.
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or
felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for
damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special
tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an
authorized dealer.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 453
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start
of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon
(HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-1234yf — If
Equipped
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a
low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system
to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Infor-
mation Book, located in your owner’s information kit,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 454
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on the
lower right of center console. Perform the following proce-
dure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage the
front retaining tab and remove the cover.
Console Closeout Panel
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel
dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal
injury.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 455
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash
panel
Hush Panel
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the
top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door
out and lift up.
Air Filter Cover Location
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 456
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of the
housing. Take note of the air filter position indicators.
A/C Air Filter
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position indica-
tors pointing in the same direction as removal.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
panel and console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat
tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate,
decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar
Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any
lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease
should be removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood latch,
release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year,
preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a
high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri-
cant directly into the lock cylinder.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly
install the filter will result in the need to replace it more
often.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 457
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the wind-
shield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild
nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt
or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the
windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petro-
leum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of
blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected peri-
odically, not just when wiper performance problems are
experienced. This inspection should include the following
points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt
to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 458
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass,
until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up
the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the
wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 459
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with
one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade toward
the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade
from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade
side of the wiper facing up and away from the wind-
shield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening
in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the
wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it
into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accom-
panied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 460
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless
the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to
fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp the
bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with
your right hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm
as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past
its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin
from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Blade
3 — Wiper Arm
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 461
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm to
disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless
the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to
fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the
end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper
arm with one hand, and apply pressure on the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper
arm pivot cap back into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or
if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 462
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have
an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, dete-
riorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrica-
tion or oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventu-
ally poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety
Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass
or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and
may seriously reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the
event of engine malfunction, particularly involving
engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance,
have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible
damage to the converter and vehicle.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 463
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing,
or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or
malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the
radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan
starts automatically and may start at any time, whether
the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at
any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 464
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accu-
mulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face
of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRES-
SURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly.
Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe
internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032),
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with
the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 465
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene
glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene
glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended
maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze)
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level
of protection against freezing according to the tempera-
tures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 466
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467
(Continued)
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion
bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accu-
mulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do
not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or
allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean
up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for deter-
mining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off
and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no
need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless
checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over-
heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not
remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or
under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified
for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may
result.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 467
468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should be
added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of
operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of
the engine compartment. This is normally a result of mois-
ture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens,
allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely
driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter oper-
ation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the
correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsat-
isfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor
gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 468
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the brake master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if
the brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level within the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the
top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads
are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the
system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on
the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Speci-
fications” for further information. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The proper type
of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in
a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder
reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpect-
edly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 469
470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure
optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid spec-
ifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid
at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmis-
sion. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged,
causing partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 470
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the
factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the
vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated
(with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an
authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust
the fluid level accurately.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 471
472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the
tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the
same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that
are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on US design standards
and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the side-
wall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 472
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 473
474 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain oper-
ating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions
(i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 474
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white side-
walls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the
outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is
approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was
manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 475
476 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare
tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recom-
mended pressure for your vehicle.
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is
measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 476
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 477
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 477
478 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard
in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle
weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not
be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined
weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight refer-
enced here.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 478
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 479
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with
varying seating configurations and number and size of
occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and
may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity
of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 479
480 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 480
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 481
(Continued)
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satis-
factory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are
affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety
• Fuel Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or
over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage
that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or
left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 481
482 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-
inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's
side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold
tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of
outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tempera-
ture changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 482
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 483
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions
are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-
taining correct tire inflation pressure is very important.
Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (side-
wall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at
continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 483
484 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and addi-
tional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experi-
enced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately
with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run
Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities
and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after driving with
underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPM sensor
as it is not designed to be reused when driven under run flat
mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a
flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are
stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 484
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 485
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher,
and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rota-
tion of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 485
486 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little expo-
sure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil,
grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear
and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when replacement
is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indica-
tors” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the orig-
inal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may have
on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling,
and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating
other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combi-
nations of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension compo-
nents. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 486
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 487
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If
your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient tempera-
tures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice
or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “moun-
tain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 487
488 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was
originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be
operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than
that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires;
therefore, local laws should be checked before using these
tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare
tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting And
Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel
— If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 488
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 489
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conven-
tional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is
designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This
tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or
rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs
to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and
reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment
tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and rein-
stall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 489
490 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome
plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild
(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to
always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc.,
and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe
away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.
They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps
keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel
cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or
their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 490
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 491
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended
period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive
your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water drop-
lets from the brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration
when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer
• Use on front tires only
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are
recommended:
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire sizes
are not chainable.
• Snow chains are permitted with the use of 215/60R17 tires
on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
• Use reduced size snow chains with a maximum projection
of 7 mm beyond the tire profile.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models without
a Two-Speed Power Transfer Unit
• Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire sizes
are not chainable.
• Snow chains are permitted with the use of 215/60R17 tires
on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
• Use reduced size snow chains with a maximum projection
of 9 mm beyond the tire profile.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD
SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a
regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 491
492 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with a
Two-Speed Power Transfer Unit
• Snow chains are permitted with 225/65R17 and 225/60R18
tires.
• Use reduced size snow chains with a maximum projection
of 7 mm beyond the tire profile.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
• Original equipment 245/65R17 and P245/65R17 sizes are
not chainable.
• Snow chains are permitted with the use of 225/65R17 tires
on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
• Use reduced size snow chains with a maximum projection
of 9 mm beyond the tire profile.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
• Use on front tires only.
• Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may
result if tire chains or traction devices are used with
original equipment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models without a
Two-Speed Power Transfer Unit may result if tire
chains or traction devices are used with original equip-
ment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
may result if tire chains or traction devices are used
with original equipment size tires.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between
tires and other suspension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
device before further use.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 492
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 493
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet
ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance
intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method is
the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that
must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten
after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested oper-
ating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 493
494 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 494
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 495
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy loca-
tion the windows open slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery post
and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During
storage check battery charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical
system, check the battery charge every 30 days.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 495
496 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protective
waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades
and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care
not to damage the painted surface by dragging across dirty
surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not allow
the evaporation of moisture present on the surface of the
vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) higher
than recommended on the tire placard and check it period-
ically.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for two weeks
or more, idle the engine for approximately five minutes,
with the air conditioning system on and high fan speed.
This will ensure proper lubrication of the system, thus
minimizing the possibility of damage to the compressor
when the vehicle is put back into operation.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least
30 days, an Extended Park Starting Procedure is required to
start the vehicle.
Refer to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees
and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive
to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes
your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals to
the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition switch in
the OFF position and close the driver’s door. When
reconnecting the positive and negative terminals to the
battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position
and the driver’s door is closed.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 496
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 497
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance
built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in
the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap,
and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint
finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 497
498 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the
doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have
your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well pack-
aged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or
stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or luke-
warm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as
steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal
and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many
are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas
they may cause respiratory harm.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 498
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 499
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must
be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act
as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 499
500 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original
condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and
FCA recommends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 500
501
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The VIN
number also is stamped into the right front body, on the right
front seat cross member. With the seat in the rear most posi-
tion a flap in the carpet can be cut open and lifted to reveal
the VIN. It also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of
the engine block.
Vehicle Identification Number
8
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 501
502 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems.
If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function. However,
there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation
of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated
brake applications with the engine OFF) the brakes will still
function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle
will be much greater than that required with the power
system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts
and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 502
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 503
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully
engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
8
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 503
504 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.0L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emission require-
ments, and provide satisfactory fuel economy and
performance, when using high-quality unleaded
“regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87, as specified
by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
“premium” gasoline will allow these engines to operate to
optimal performance. This increase in performance is most
noticeable in hot weather or other heavier load conditions,
such as while towing.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immedi-
ately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or not
be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
2.4L & 3.2L Engines
These engine are designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and
performance when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
“Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not provide
any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause
for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gaso-
line with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine
failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 504
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 505
lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly
blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not
be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate.
Please observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol
(E-15).
8
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 505
506 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a
manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into
some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with
MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline
of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended
with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions
system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated
on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gaso-
line retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is
prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a
higher level of detergents to further aide in mini-
mizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to over-
heat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some
light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 506
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 507
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel
system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage,
and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
WARNING! (Continued)
8
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 507
508 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.0L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API SN PLUS Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.2L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.0L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
9 Quarts 8.6 Liters
2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
3.2L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 508
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 509
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.0L Engine
We recommend you use Mopar API SN PLUS Certified SAE
5W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-13340.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-30 engine oil can be used if
it meets API SN PLUS Certification. If SN PLUS or
equivalent oil is unavailable then please contact your local
dealership for recommendation.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended SN PLUS or equivalent oil
can cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
8
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 509
510 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.0L, 2.4L and 3.2L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any
“globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhib-
itors or antirust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 510
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 511
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission
Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE
J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
8
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 511
512
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are
easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these
steps:
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Apps Menu
1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, and then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on the
main menu bar.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 512
MULTIMEDIA 513
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features
to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle soft-
ware technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US
LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appro-
priate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your systems or to
reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of
vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of
unknown origin could possibly contain malicious soft-
ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase
the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior,
take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer
immediately.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 513
514 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the
potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (US Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents)
to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept informa-
tion and private communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
NOTE:
Features can vary by vehicle.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3
Settings
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the
settings menu screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system
allows you to access all of the available programmable
features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 514
MULTIMEDIA 515
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
press and release the preferred setting and make your selec-
tion. Once the setting is complete, press the X/Done icon on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the ON/
RUN position.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with the selectable
options pertaining to each setting.
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language English Français Español
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Brightness + -
NOTE:
The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touch-
screen.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 515
516 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Touchscreen Beep Yes No
Voice Settings Voice Response Length Show Command List
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
• The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.
• The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L) and “Pressure” (kPa, or bar) units of
measurement independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct
time.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 516
MULTIMEDIA 517
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Show Time Status — If
Equipped
On Off
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with
dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R). This delay will be canceled if the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel posi-
tion when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or
aligning to a hitch/receiver.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 517
518 MULTIMEDIA
Forward Collision Warning
Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Far Med Near
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly
in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision, based on the option selected. Far will
give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas Near will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the
distance between the two vehicles.
Forward Collision Warning
Plus (FCW+) — If Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning and Brake
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Warning
Only” option is selected, a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more
brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning and Brake” option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in
case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Front ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Side Distance Warning Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Setting Name Selectable Options
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 518
MULTIMEDIA 519
Side Distance Warning
Volume
Low Med High
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel
feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the
sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is
misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) not operating to specification.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers —
If Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 519
520 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Electric Park Brake Service
Mode
Yes No
NOTE:
The “Electric Park Brake Service Mode” feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle inte-
grated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads,
calipers, rotors, etc.). We recommend having your brakes serviced by an authorized dealer.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Brake Service Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether or not you would like to retract the park brakes
to allow brake system service.
Auto Park Brake On Off
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 520
MULTIMEDIA 521
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Level 1: minimum
sensitivity
Level 2: medium
sensitivity
Level 3: maximum sensitivity
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3
at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the engine is shut off.
Greeting Lights On Off
Automatic High Beam
Headlamps — If Equipped
On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is
only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Cornering Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are
on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will activate on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 521
522 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Flash Lights With Lock — If
Equipped
On Off
Interior Ambient Lights + -
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons
on the touchscreen.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) position and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Horn With Lock On Off
Horn With Remote Start — If
Equipped
On Off
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 522
MULTIMEDIA 523
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push
the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on
the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry
equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s door is
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Memory Linked To FOB — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering
column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Alert — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Power Liftgate Alert” feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 523
524 MULTIMEDIA
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If
Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tempera-
tures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut
off.
Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a preset time after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 524
MULTIMEDIA 525
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons
on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also
allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade
Up Arrow
Button
Down Arrow
Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right Arrow
Button
Center C
Button
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to
adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center C button on the touchscreen
to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 525
526 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the
AUX input.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude unde-
sirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 526
MULTIMEDIA 527
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio.
Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information
screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen
or visit the provider online.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the Restore Settings feature is selected, it will reset all of the audio settings to their default settings.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 527
528 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4
Personal Settings
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Buttons On Touchscreen
And Buttons On Faceplate
Press the Apps button, and then press the Settings button
on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access program-
mable features that may be equipped such as Language,
Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Brakes, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off
Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM® Setup,
Radio Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, and
System Information.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
press and release the preferred setting and make your selec-
tion. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back
Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or press the X
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the ON/
RUN position.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 528
MULTIMEDIA 529
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With
Headlights On
- +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights On" setting, the headlights must be on, and the interior dimmer
switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With
Headlights Off
- +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights Off" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer
switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
On Off
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 529
530 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption” [MPG
(US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of measurement
independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never With Help Always
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync With GPS Time On Off
Set Time Hours - +
Set Time Minutes - +
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 530
MULTIMEDIA 531
Safety/Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Time Format 12 hour 24 hour AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct
time.
Show Time in Status
Bar
On Off
Set Date — If
Equipped
Up Arrow Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE
(R) and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indi-
cate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound” or “Sound and Display.”
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 531
532 MULTIMEDIA
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the Park Assist system will detect objects located behind the
vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights and Chime
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with
dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R). This delay will be canceled if the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
Active ParkView Camera
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid
lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the
option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
Setting Name Selectable Options
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 532
MULTIMEDIA 533
Fixed ParkView Backup
Camera Guidelines
On Off
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
Forward Collision Warning
— If Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
NOTE:
Changing the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off
when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insuffi-
cient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Warning Only” option is selected, a chime will sound
alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning
and Braking” option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound
an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Far Med Near
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 533
534 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you
needs to be at before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle, based on the option selected. “Far”
will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on
the distance between the two vehicles.
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel
feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Side Distance Warning — If
Equipped
Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Side Distance Warning
Volume — If Equipped
Low Med High
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 534
MULTIMEDIA 535
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Brake Service Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether you would like to retract the park brakes to allow
brake system service.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are
unlocked with the key fob.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 535
536 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto High Beam — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto High Beams” is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain
conditions.
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is
only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission
is in the PARK or NEUTRAL (N) position and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 536
MULTIMEDIA 537
Sound Horn With
Remote Start — If
Equipped
On Off
Remote Door Unloc Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push
the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on
the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry
equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s door is
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry On Off
Memory Linked To FOB
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Memory Linked To FOB” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat,
exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Alert — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Power Liftgate Alert” feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 537
538 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat
& Steering Wheel — If
Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tempera-
tures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay — If
Equipped
0 sec 45 sec 5 min 10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if
equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled
to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the engine is shut OFF.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 538
MULTIMEDIA 539
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
Auto Entry/Exit If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Entry/Exit” feature automatically lowers the vehicle ride height position when shifted into PARK (P), when it is
selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade
Up Arrow
Button
Down Arrow
Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right Arrow
Button
Center C
Button
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to
adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center C Button on the touchscreen
to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 539
540 MULTIMEDIA
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/
Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired
setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
When selecting the “Auto Play” sub setting, a message will pop-up stating “USB devices will automatically play media when
AutoPlay is turned On”.
Loudness — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped -3 +3
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Setting Name Selectable Options
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 540
MULTIMEDIA 541
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press Do Not Disturb button to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default), and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth®
system. Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
Display Phone Info In Cluster — If
Equipped
Off On
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that
current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience
of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 541
542 MULTIMEDIA
Radio Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the Radio Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude unde-
sirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio.
Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information
screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen
or visit the provider online.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Regional — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Regional” feature is selected, it forces regional service-following enabling automatic switching to network
stations.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 542
MULTIMEDIA 543
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
Setting Name Selectable Options
System Information System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “System Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 543
544 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4C/
4C NAV Settings
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On
Faceplate And Buttons On Touchscreen
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button on
the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access program-
mable features that may be equipped such as Language,
Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Camera, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Brakes, Mirrors & Wipers, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM® Setup, Accessibility, Restore
Settings, and System Information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
press and release the preferred setting “option” until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 544
MULTIMEDIA 545
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language List of Languages
NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all
display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on
the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language,
showing that setting has been selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlights ON + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer
switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 545
546 MULTIMEDIA
Set Theme — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the
Set Theme button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that
the setting has been selected.
Keyboard — If Equipped Smart Keyboard Selection Latin Keyboard
NOTE:
Latin Keyboard displays different keyboard layouts to choose from. The selectable keyboards are ABCDEF Keyboard,
QWERTY Keyboard, and AZERTY Keyboard.
Touchscreen Beep
Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen
times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument
cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Setting Name Selectable Options
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 546
MULTIMEDIA 547
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption” [MPG
(US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of measurement
independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never W/Help Always
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 547
548 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must
be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must
be unchecked.
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If
Equipped
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 548
MULTIMEDIA 549
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with
dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R). This delay will be canceled if the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera
Guidelines
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid
lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the
option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera
Guidelines
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 549
550 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) — If Equipped
Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking
NOTE:
Changing the “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)” status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off
when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insuffi-
cient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Warning Only” option is selected, a chime will sound
alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning
+ Active Braking” option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and
sound an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly
in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision, based on the option is selected. “Far”
will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on
the distance between the two vehicles.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 550
MULTIMEDIA 551
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel
feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Side Distance Warning Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Side Distance Warning
Volume
Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE
(R) and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indi-
cate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound and Display.”
Front ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the Park Assist system will detect objects located behind the
vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 551
552 MULTIMEDIA
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is activated and will show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the BSM system is deactivated. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area
where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specifi-
cation.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel posi-
tion when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or
aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Setting Name Selectable Options
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 552
MULTIMEDIA 553
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with
dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R). This delay will be canceled if the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake
Brake Service Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether you would like to retract the park brakes to allow
brake system service.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 553
554 MULTIMEDIA
Mirror and Wipers
After pressing the Mirror and Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
Automatically adjusts the wiper speed based on the amount of precipitation.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If
Equipped
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illuminated On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 554
MULTIMEDIA 555
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically
under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is
only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) position and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 555
556 MULTIMEDIA
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When "Driver Door" is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of
the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When "All Doors"
is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle
is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped
door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock
when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver
door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If
Equipped
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering
column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Lift Gate Alert — If Equipped
Setting Name Selectable Options
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 556
MULTIMEDIA 557
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start —
If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tempera-
tures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat
Engine Off Power Delay
0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension — If
Equipped
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 557
558 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward
any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons
on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also
allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlay On Off
NOTE:
The “AutoPlay” setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connected device as soon as it is connected.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 558
MULTIMEDIA 559
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
NOTE:
The “Do Not Disturb” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text, or both, to any incoming call, or
text, before sending it directly to voicemail. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the road.
Paired Phones and Audio Sources List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio
Sources Settings system. Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
Display Phone Info In Cluster On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that
current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience
of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 559
560 MULTIMEDIA
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude unde-
sirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio.
Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information
screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen
or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Video Button Readback On Off
NOTE:
When activated, the “Video Button Readback” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when
using DVD/Blu-ray™ functions. For example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce
“Play Button Selected”, and then once pressed again, the Play button will perform its action.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 560
MULTIMEDIA 561
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and
presets.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Software License” screen will appear, displaying the system software license and version.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 561
562 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the
sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/AUX,
etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listen-
able station and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek
down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control will
tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in
the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within 8 seconds after the current track begins to play.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 562
MULTIMEDIA 563
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Instrument Panel Media Hub
Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an
External USB device or AUX electronic device to be plugged
into the port or jack.
If equipped, there may also be a USB Port in the Center
Console located to the left of the Power Outlet.
Center Console USB Port
A third and fourth USB Ports are located behind the center
console, above the power inverter. Both are charge only USB
ports.
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 563
564 MULTIMEDIA
Charge Only USB Ports
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relo-
cating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if
equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found
in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations,
which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless
radios may be restricted in some situations or environments,
such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions,
you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio.
1 — Charge only Type C USB and Type A USB Port
2 — Charge only Type C USB and Type A USB Port
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 564
MULTIMEDIA 565
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 565
566 MULTIMEDIA
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you
need to know to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 566
MULTIMEDIA 567
Uconnect 4C NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps
menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the Uconnect
4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch
display system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
• Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
• Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in the
middle console above the rear-view mirror and aimed at
the driver.
• Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push
either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button, wait
until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
• You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by
pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 567
568 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point
while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
• “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
• “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recogni-
tion system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen for the
Uconnect 3 radio and above the main menu bar for Uconnect
4/4C NAV radios.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription
or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”.
• “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”.
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A
Text
2 — For All Radios: Push Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, Apps And Climate Functions
3 — Push To End Call
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 568
MULTIMEDIA 569
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to
learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say
“Help.” The system provides you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 3 Radio
Uconnect 4 Radio
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 569
570 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth® and auxil-
iary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available for
connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch your
media source or choose an artist/album/song/genre.
• “Change source to Bluetooth®”.
• “Change source to iPod®”.
• “Change source to USB”.
• “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
“Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 570
MULTIMEDIA 571
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the
music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must
match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre infor-
mation is displayed.
Uconnect 3 Media
Uconnect 4 Media
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 571
572 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready to make a phone call.
You may have to wait for a few moments to issue a Voice
Command for hands-free calling. Check Uconnect-
Phone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions (for US and Canadian residents).
Push the VR button or Phone button . After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
• “Call John Smith”.
• “Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”.
• “Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”.
• “Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”.
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the VR button
or Phone button and say “Call”, then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has
multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith
work”.
Uconnect 3 Phone
Uconnect 4 Phone
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 572
MULTIMEDIA 573
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the VR
button or Phone button (if enabled) and say “Listen”.
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect
system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
VR button or Phone button (if enabled). After the
beep, say: “Reply”.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the system does
not transpose the message.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this
feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without me. I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or 10,
15, 20, 25, 30, 45,
60> minutes late.
Call me. Are you there yet?
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 573
574 MULTIMEDIA
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple®
iPhone®, follow these four simple steps:
iPhone® Notification Settings
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone®, but if your
vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”.
• “Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”.
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the
interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will
not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel (if
equipped).
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth®”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 574
MULTIMEDIA 575
Uconnect 4 Climate
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 575
576 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to get
to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the
beep, say: “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan or Enter State”.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a Point of Interest (POI) search, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee shop”.
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 576
MULTIMEDIA 577
SiriusXM Guardian™ (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the
subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian™,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV touch-
screen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on properly equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services, including SOS
Call and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work
without an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 577
578 MULTIMEDIA
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian™
services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will activate
services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to acti-
vate on the web.
• US residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs
if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian™. Your vehicle
will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects
issues with its key systems that need your attention. For
further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using a connected car
experience.
Mobile App
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 578
MULTIMEDIA 579
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
1. Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian™
services, download the Uconnect App to your mobile
device. Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app.
2. Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
3. Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar of the
app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a
location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.
4. Press the “Settings” side menu button in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings.
NOTE:
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com (US
Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM® Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a
sports score or the 5-day weather forecast? SiriusXM® Travel
Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information
right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not available for
Uconnect 4 system.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “Show fuel prices”.
• “Show 5-day weather forecast”.
• “Show extended weather”.
TIP:
Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command. Traffic
alerts provide you with an alternate route to help you avoid
construction or delays from reported traffic incidents. Use
your touchscreen to accept or decline the recommended
reroute.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 579
580 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Travel Link
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
Available on iPhone® 4s and later.
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, schedule
meetings, select media, place phone calls and much more.
Siri uses your natural language to understand what you
mean and responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your
hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful
tasks.
To begin, ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone®. Pair your
Siri-enabled device to your Uconnect system. Push and hold,
then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on
the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask
Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text
messages and many other useful requests.
Uconnect 4 Siri® Eyes Free Available
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 580
MULTIMEDIA 581
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Siri® Eyes Free Avail-
able
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message,
a call, or both, when declining an incoming call and send it
to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so
you can still place a second call without being interrupted by
incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen
on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones®.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones
that supporting Bluetooth® MAP.
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 581
582 MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto™ — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may or
may not be available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s™ best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or
higher to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android
Auto™ icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main
menu bar to begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Micro-
phone” icon within Android Auto™, to activate Android’s™
VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list
of your smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Android Auto™ On 7-inch Display
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 582
MULTIMEDIA 583
Android Auto™ On 8.4-inch Display
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running Android™ 5.0
(Lollipop) or higher and download app on Google Play.
Android™, Android Auto™, and Google Play are trade-
marks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may or
may not be available in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touch-
screen. Connect your iPhone® 5, or higher, to one of the
media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay® icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 583
584 MULTIMEDIA
Apple CarPlay® On 7-inch Display
Apple CarPlay® On 8.4-inch Display
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for phone compat-
ibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a
product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of
Apple® Inc. iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 584
MULTIMEDIA 585
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science, and Economic Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer-
encia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer-
encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Ucon-
nect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is
a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android™ is a trademark of
Google Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours
a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US Resi-
dents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
9
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 585
586
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can
often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific
work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done
that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor
know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle
by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service
advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many autho-
rized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal
daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make
these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally inter-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest infor-
mation to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 586
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 587
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this
process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
10
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 587
588 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manu-
facturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a
TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufac-
turer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's
service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an
Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of
the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the
service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian resi-
dents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract
that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufac-
turer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract
that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require
service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when
you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also
made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership
experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to
resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 588
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 589
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its
best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should imme-
diately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA
US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, an authorized dealer
or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from http:/
/www.safercar.gov.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained
in vehicles and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 589
590 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the informa-
tion that students and professional technicians need in diag-
nosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete
working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or compo-
nents is written in straightforward language with illustra-
tions, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct prob-
lems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting,
operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well
as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (US)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (US)
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 590
591
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .................................................................502
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) .............295
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................................466
Adding Fuel.............................................................................368
Additives, Fuel ........................................................................506
Air Bag......................................................................................219
Air Bag Operation...............................................................221
Air Bag Warning Light...............................................217, 222
Driver Knee Air Bag ...........................................................229
Enhanced Accident Response ...................................234, 437
Event Data Recorder (EDR)...............................................437
Front Air Bag ...............................................................219, 222
If Deployment Occurs ........................................................233
Knee Impact Bolsters ..........................................................228
Maintaining Your Air Bag System....................................235
Maintenance.........................................................................235
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light..................................218
Transporting Pets................................................................256
Air Bag Light ...........................................................151, 217, 258
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ................450
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............................................454
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ..................................................454
Air Conditioner System .........................................................454
Air Conditioning.....................................................................100
Air Conditioning Filter...................................................103, 455
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ........................................101
Air Filter ...................................................................................450
Air Pressure
Tires.......................................................................................482
Alarm
Arm The System....................................................................35
Disarm The System ...............................................................35
Security Alarm...............................................................34, 156
All Wheel Drive (AWD).........................................................280
Android Auto ..........................................................................582
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..........................................465, 507
Disposal ................................................................................467
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............................................167
Anti-Lock Warning Light.......................................................156
Apple CarPlay .........................................................................583
Assist, Hill Start.......................................................................175
Audio Systems (Radio)...........................................................512
Auto Down Power Windows ................................................105
Auto Up Power Windows .....................................................105
Automatic Door Locks .............................................................43
Automatic Headlights ..............................................................68
Automatic High Beams ............................................................67
11
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 591
592
Automatic Tailgate Release ...................................................116
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............................101
Automatic Transaxle ..............................................................270
Automatic Transmission........................................................272
Adding Fluid .......................................................................471
Fluid And Filter Change ....................................................471
Fluid Change........................................................................471
Fluid Level Check .......................................................470, 471
Fluid Type ............................................................................470
Special Additives.................................................................470
Torque Converter................................................................279
Autostick ..................................................................................278
AUX Cord ................................................................................563
Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .......................................................131
B
Battery...............................................................................153, 446
Charging System Light.......................................................153
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ............................................21
Battery Saver Feature ...............................................................71
Belts, Seat .................................................................................257
Blind Spot Monitoring............................................................183
Body Mechanism Lubrication...............................................457
B-Pillar Location......................................................................476
Brake Assist System........................................................169, 190
Brake Control System.............................................................168
Brake Fluid...............................................................................469
Brake System....................................................................468, 502
Anti-Lock (ABS)...................................................................502
Fluid Check ..........................................................................469
Master Cylinder...................................................................469
Parking..................................................................................265
Warning Light......................................................................152
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..............................................272
Brightness, Interior Lights .......................................................72
Bulb Replacement ...................................................................399
Bulbs, Light ..............................................................................260
C
Camera, Rear............................................................................366
Capacities, Fluid......................................................................507
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ..................................................442, 443, 444, 449
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)...............................................467
Car Washes ..............................................................................497
Carbon Monoxide Warning...................................................507
Cargo Area Cover ...................................................................118
Cargo Area Features...............................................................118
Cargo Compartment...............................................................118
Cargo Load Floor ....................................................................118
Cargo Tie-Downs ....................................................................118
Cellular Phone .........................................................................564
Center Seat Storage Compartment .......................................127
Certification Label...................................................................371
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 592
593
Changing A Flat Tire......................................................409, 471
Chart, Tire Sizing ....................................................................473
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) ...........165
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety........................................256
Checks, Safety..........................................................................256
Child Restraint ........................................................................237
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................................................240
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .........................250
Infant And Child Restraints ..............................................239
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .....................242
Older Children And Child Restraints..............................239
Seating Positions .................................................................241
Clean Air Gasoline..................................................................504
Cleaning
Wheels...................................................................................490
Climate Control.........................................................................79
Cold Weather Operation........................................................262
Compact Spare Tire ................................................................488
Console
Storage ..................................................................................127
Contract, Service .....................................................................588
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..................................467
Cooling System .......................................................................464
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze).............................................466
Coolant Level.......................................................................467
Cooling Capacity.................................................................507
Disposal Of Used Coolant..................................................467
Drain, Flush, And Refill .....................................................465
Inspection .....................................................................464, 467
Points To Remember...........................................................468
Pressure Cap ........................................................................467
Radiator Cap ........................................................................467
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............................465, 507
Corrosion Protection...............................................................496
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ....................................292, 295
Cruise Light .............................................................161, 162, 163
Cupholders...............................................................................130
Customer Assistance ..............................................................586
Cybersecurity...........................................................................513
D
Daytime Running Lights....................................................67, 73
Dealer Service ..........................................................................447
Defroster, Windshield ............................................................258
De-Icer, Remote Start................................................................31
Diagnostic System, Onboard.................................................164
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..........................................................................445
Disable Vehicle Towing .........................................................432
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..............................................467
Do Not Disturb........................................................................581
11
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 593
594
Door Ajar..........................................................................153, 154
Door Ajar Light ...............................................................153, 154
Door Locks
Automatic...............................................................................43
Doors...........................................................................................36
Drag And Drop Menu............................................................512
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..............................................................44
Driving......................................................................................388
E
Easy Entry Seats ........................................................................55
Electric Brake Control System...............................................168
Anti-Lock Brake System.....................................................167
Electronic Roll Mitigation ..........................................170, 177
Electric Parking Brake ............................................................265
Electrical Power Outlets.........................................................131
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)..................292, 295
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ........................................171
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.........................153
Emergency
SOS Emergency Call ...........................................................393
Emergency Gas Can Refueling .............................................429
Emergency, In Case Of
Gear Selector Override.......................................................430
Hazard Warning Flasher....................................................393
Jacking ..........................................................................409, 471
Jump Starting.......................................................................426
Emission Control System Maintenance ...............................165
Engine .......................................................................442, 443, 444
Air Cleaner ...........................................................................450
Block Heater.........................................................................263
Break-In Recommendations...............................................264
Checking Oil Level..............................................................445
Cooling..................................................................................464
Exhaust Gas Caution...........................................................507
Fails To Start.........................................................................263
Flooded, Starting .................................................................263
Fuel Requirements ..............................................................504
Jump Starting .......................................................................426
Oil ..................................................................................447, 507
Oil Filler Cap................................................442, 443, 444, 449
Oil Filter................................................................................450
Oil Reset................................................................................142
Oil Selection .........................................................447, 448, 507
Oil Synthetic.........................................................................449
Overheating..........................................................................430
Engine Oil Viscosity........................................................448, 449
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart.............................................448, 449
Enhanced Accident Response Feature.........................234, 437
Ethanol......................................................................................505
Exhaust Gas Cautions.............................................................507
Exhaust System........................................................................462
Exterior Lights ...................................................................66, 260
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 594
595
F
Filters
Air Cleaner...........................................................................450
Air Conditioning.........................................................103, 455
Engine Oil.............................................................................450
Engine Oil Disposal ............................................................449
Flashers
Hazard Warning..................................................................393
Turn Signals .................................................................162, 260
Flash-To-Pass.............................................................................68
Flat Tire Changing ..........................................................471, 488
Flat Tire Stowage ............................................................471, 488
Flooded Engine Starting ........................................................263
Fluid Capacities.......................................................................508
Fluid Leaks...............................................................................260
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .....................................................................................469
Engine Oil.............................................................................445
Fluids And Lubricants ...........................................................509
Fob, Key......................................................................................18
Fog Lights...................................................................................70
Fold-Flat Seats ...........................................................................44
Folding Rear Seats ....................................................................48
Forward Collision Warning ..................................................190
Four Wheel Drive....................................................................280
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle.........................................................431
Fuel
Additives ..............................................................................506
Clean Air...............................................................................504
Ethanol..................................................................................505
Light ......................................................................................157
Materials Added..................................................................506
Methanol...............................................................................505
Tank Capacity......................................................................507
Fueling ......................................................................................368
Fuses..........................................................................................400
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)........................................120
Gasoline, Clean Air.................................................................504
Gasoline, Reformulated..........................................................504
Gear Ranges .............................................................................273
Gear Selector Override ...........................................................430
Glass Cleaning.........................................................................500
Gross Axle Weight Rating .....................................................374
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.................................................373
GVWR.......................................................................................371
H
Hazard Warning Flashers......................................................393
Head Restraint Removal ..........................................................58
Head Restraints .........................................................................58
Head Rests..................................................................................58
11
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 595
596
Headlights..................................................................................67
Automatic...............................................................................68
Automatic High Beam..........................................................67
Cleaning................................................................................497
High Beam........................................................................66, 67
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ................................67
On With Wipers.....................................................................69
Passing..............................................................................66, 68
Switch......................................................................................67
Time Delay .............................................................................69
Heated Mirrors..........................................................................65
Heated Seats ........................................................................55, 56
Heated Steering Wheel.............................................................61
Heater, Engine Block ..............................................................263
Hill Descent Control...............................................................177
Hill Descent Control Indicator..............................................177
Hill Start Assist........................................................................175
Hitches
Trailer Towing.....................................................................375
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .......................................120
Hood Prop................................................................................112
Hood Release...........................................................................112
I
Ignition .......................................................................................24
Switch......................................................................................24
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ...............................................................16
Inside Rearview Mirror ..............................................62, 63, 393
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .................................................................137, 162
Display..................................................................................140
Engine Oil Reset ..................................................................142
Menu Items...........................................................................143
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning...........................................499
Interior Appearance Care ......................................................498
Interior Lights............................................................................71
Introduction ...............................................................................13
Inverter
Power ....................................................................................134
J
Jack Location............................................................................409
Jack Operation .................................................................409, 471
Jacking And Tire Changing ...................................................409
Jump Starting...........................................................................426
K
Key Fob
Arm The System....................................................................35
Disarm The System ...............................................................35
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............................22, 32
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry).................21
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 596
597
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ..................22
Key-In Reminder.......................................................................27
Keyless Enter-N-Go..................................................................38
Passive Entry..........................................................................38
Keys.............................................................................................18
Replacement.....................................................................22, 32
L
Lane Change Assist ..................................................................71
LaneSense.................................................................................359
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................................................204
Latches......................................................................................260
Hood .....................................................................................112
Leaks, Fluid..............................................................................260
Life Of Tires .............................................................................485
Liftgate......................................................................................113
Closing..................................................................................115
Hands-Free...........................................................................116
Opening................................................................................113
Light Bulbs...............................................................................260
Lights ........................................................................................260
Air Bag..................................................................151, 217, 258
Automatic Headlights ..........................................................68
Automatic High Beam..........................................................67
Brake Assist Warning .........................................................174
Brake Warning.....................................................................152
Bulb Replacement ...............................................................399
Cruise ....................................................................161, 162, 163
Daytime Running..................................................................67
Engine Temperature Warning...........................................154
Exterior............................................................................66, 260
Fog ...........................................................................................70
High Beam........................................................................66, 67
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............................................67
Hill Descent Control Indicator ..........................................177
Intensity Control....................................................................72
Interior ....................................................................................71
Lights On Reminder..............................................................69
Low Fuel ...............................................................................157
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine).............................157
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness)....................................73
Park........................................................................................162
Passing ....................................................................................68
Seat Belt Reminder..............................................................151
Security Alarm.....................................................................156
Service...................................................................................399
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS).....................................195
Traction Control ..................................................................174
Turn Signals ...........................................................70, 162, 260
Vanity Mirror.................................................................65, 131
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ..............154, 162
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode.............................................149
Load Shed Battery Saver On..................................................149
11
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 597
598
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction..................................149
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor...................................149
Loading Vehicle ......................................................................371
Tires.......................................................................................476
Locks
Automatic Door.....................................................................43
Child Protection ....................................................................43
Power Door ............................................................................37
Low Tire Pressure System .....................................................195
Lubrication, Body ...................................................................457
Lug Nuts/Bolts .......................................................................502
Luggage Carrier ......................................................................135
M
Maintenance.............................................................................111
Maintenance Free Battery ......................................................446
Maintenance Schedule ...........................................................438
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)..............157, 165
Manual
Service...................................................................................590
Media Hub ...............................................................................563
Memory Feature (Memory Seats)...........................................52
Methanol ..................................................................................505
Mirrors........................................................................................62
Heated.....................................................................................65
Outside ...................................................................................64
Rearview...................................................................62, 63, 393
Vanity..............................................................................65, 131
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.....................................................................................15
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..............................................195
Mopar Parts..............................................................................589
MP3 Control.............................................................................563
Multi-Function Control Lever.................................................66
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period................................................264
O
Occupant Restraints................................................................202
Oil Filter, Change ....................................................................450
Oil Filter, Selection..................................................................450
Oil Pressure Light ...................................................................154
Oil Reset....................................................................................142
Oil, Engine................................................................................447
Capacity................................................................................507
Change Interval ...................................................................447
Checking...............................................................................445
Dipstick.................................................................................445
Disposal ................................................................................449
Filter ......................................................................................450
Filter Disposal......................................................................449
Identification Logo..............................................................448
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 598
599
Materials Added To............................................................449
Pressure Warning Light .....................................................154
Recommendation ................................................447, 448, 507
Synthetic ...............................................................................449
Viscosity ...............................................................448, 449, 507
Onboard Diagnostic System..................................................164
Operating Precautions............................................................164
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual............................................................15, 590
Outside Rearview Mirrors.......................................................64
Overheating, Engine...............................................................430
P
Paddle Shifters.........................................................................278
Paint Care.................................................................................496
Parking Brake ..........................................................................265
ParkSense Active Park Assist................................................333
ParkSense System, Rear .................................................315, 323
Passive Entry .............................................................................38
Personalized Main Menu.......................................................512
Pets............................................................................................256
Pinch Protection ......................................................................111
Placard, Tire And Loading Information..............................476
Power
Brakes....................................................................................502
Door Locks .............................................................................37
Inverter .................................................................................134
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..................................131
Windows...............................................................................104
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts..........................................214
Preparation For Jacking..........................................................409
Pretensioners
Seat Belts...............................................................................214
R
Radial Ply Tires .......................................................................483
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)..................................467
Radio Operation......................................................................564
Rain Sensitive Wiper System...................................................77
Rear Camera.............................................................................366
Rear Cross Path .......................................................................188
Rear ParkSense System ..................................................315, 323
Rear Seats, Folding....................................................................48
Rear Wiper/Washer .................................................................78
Recreational Towing...............................................................382
Shifting Into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N)...............385
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N)...........................385
Shifting Out Of Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N)..........387
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....................387
Reformulated Gasoline...........................................................504
Refrigerant................................................................................454
Release, Hood ..........................................................................112
Reminder, Lights On ................................................................69
Reminder, Seat Belt.................................................................203
11
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 599
600
Remote Control
Starting System......................................................................28
Remote Keyless Entry ..............................................................20
Arm The Alarm .....................................................................35
Disarm The Alarm ................................................................35
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............................22, 32
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .......................................................30
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ...................30
Uconnect Settings..................................................................30
Remote Starting System ...........................................................28
Replacement Keys...............................................................22, 32
Replacement Tires...................................................................486
Reporting Safety Defects........................................................589
Restraints, Child......................................................................237
Restraints, Head........................................................................58
Roll Over Warning....................................................................14
Roof Type Carrier ...................................................................135
Rotation, Tires .........................................................................493
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.................................................257
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .............................................260
Safety Defects, Reporting.......................................................589
Safety Information, Tire .........................................................471
Safety Tips................................................................................256
Schedule, Maintenance ..........................................................438
Seat Belt Reminder..................................................................151
Seat Belts...........................................................................203, 257
Adjustable Shoulder Belt....................................................209
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage...........................209
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage...................209
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ................................215
Child Restraints ...................................................................237
Energy Management Feature ............................................214
Extender................................................................................213
Front Seat..............................................................203, 204, 207
Inspection .............................................................................257
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation............................................207
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting..........................................208
Lap/Shoulder Belts.............................................................204
Operating Instructions........................................................207
Pregnant Women.................................................................214
Pretensioners........................................................................214
Rear Seat ...............................................................................204
Reminder ..............................................................................203
Seat Belt Extender................................................................213
Seat Belt Pretensioner .........................................................214
Untwisting Procedure.........................................................208
Seat Belts Maintenance...........................................................498
Seats.............................................................................................44
Adjustment.............................................................................44
Easy Entry...............................................................................55
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 600
601
Head Restraints .....................................................................58
Heated...............................................................................55, 56
Memory ..................................................................................52
Rear Folding...........................................................................44
Tilting......................................................................................44
Ventilated ...............................................................................57
Security Alarm ..................................................................34, 156
Arm The System....................................................................35
Disarm The System...............................................................35
Selec-Terrain ............................................................................286
Sentry Key
Key Programming.................................................................32
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ........................................................32
Sentry Key Replacement....................................................22, 32
Service Assistance ...................................................................586
Service Contract ......................................................................588
Service Manuals ......................................................................590
Shift Lever Override...............................................................430
Shifting
Automatic Transmission....................................................272
Power Transfer Unit, Shifting Into Power Transfer
Unit Neutral (N)..........................................................385, 387
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N)...........................................................................385
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N)...........................................................................387
Shoulder Belts..........................................................................204
Side View Mirror Adjustment.................................................64
Signals, Turn ....................................................................162, 260
Siri..............................................................................................580
SiriusXM Guardian
Vehicle Health Alert ...........................................................578
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................................................491
Snow Tires................................................................................487
Spare Tires........................................................................488, 489
Speed Control
Accel/Decel..........................................................................292
Cancel............................................................................292, 294
Resume..........................................................................292, 294
Set ..........................................................................................292
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....................................292, 295
Starting......................................................................................261
Button......................................................................................24
Cold Weather .......................................................................262
Engine Fails To Start ...........................................................263
Remote ....................................................................................28
Starting Procedures.................................................................261
Steering
Tilt Column ............................................................................61
Wheel, Heated........................................................................61
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ............................................562
11
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 601
602
Stop/Start.................................................................................162
Storage..............................................................................126, 127
Console .................................................................................127
Storage Compartment, Center Seat......................................127
Storage, Vehicle.......................................................................102
Stuck, Freeing ..........................................................................431
Sun Roof ...........................................................................107, 111
Closing..................................................................................107
Opening................................................................................107
Sun Visor..................................................................................131
Sun Visor Extension..................................................................66
Sunshade Operation ...............................................................107
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag ..........................219
Sway Control, Trailer .............................................................182
Synthetic Engine Oil...............................................................449
System, Remote Starting ..........................................................28
T
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............................101
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ........................................................118
Time Delay
Headlight................................................................................69
Tire And Loading Information Placard...............................476
Tire Markings ..........................................................................472
Tire Safety Information ..........................................................471
Tire Service Kit ........................................417, 418, 420, 424, 425
Tires...................................................................260, 481, 488, 494
Aging (Life Of Tires)...........................................................485
Air Pressure..........................................................................481
Chains ...................................................................................491
Changing ......................................................................409, 471
Compact Spare.....................................................................488
General Information....................................................481, 488
High Speed...........................................................................483
Inflation Pressure ................................................................482
Jacking...........................................................................409, 471
Life Of Tires..........................................................................485
Load Capacity..............................................................476, 478
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......................159, 195
Quality Grading...................................................................494
Radial ....................................................................................483
Replacement.........................................................................486
Rotation.................................................................................493
Safety.............................................................................471, 481
Sizes.......................................................................................473
Snow Tires............................................................................487
Spare Tires....................................................................488, 489
Spinning................................................................................484
Trailer Towing .....................................................................379
Tread Wear Indicators........................................................485
Wheel Nut Torque...............................................................502
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 602
603
To Open Hood.........................................................................112
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight............................................377
Torque Converter Clutch.......................................................279
Towing......................................................................373, 376, 432
Disabled Vehicle..................................................................432
Recreational..........................................................................382
Towing Behind A Motorhome..............................................382
Traction Control ......................................................................177
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...................................................182
Trailer Towing.........................................................................373
Cooling System Tips...........................................................382
Hitches..................................................................................375
Minimum Requirements....................................................378
Tips........................................................................................381
Trailer And Tongue Weight ......................................376, 377
Wiring ...................................................................................380
Trailer Towing Guide.............................................................376
Trailer Weight..........................................................................376
Transaxle
Automatic.............................................................................270
Operation..............................................................................270
Transmission............................................................................272
Automatic.....................................................................272, 470
Maintenance.........................................................................470
Transporting Pets....................................................................256
Tread Wear Indicators............................................................485
Turn Signals.................................................................66, 70, 162
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings..........................................................30, 514
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features.......................30, 38, 514
Passive Entry Programming................................................38
Uconnect Voice Command ....................................................566
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................................................494
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................120
Universal Transmitter ............................................................120
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...........................................208
USB............................................................................................563
V
Vanity Mirrors ...........................................................................65
Vehicle Loading...............................................................371, 478
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.........................................15
Vehicle Storage ........................................................................102
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ......................................................................16
Navigation..............................................................................16
Operating Instructions..........................................................16
Searching User Guide...........................................................16
Ventilated Seats .........................................................................57
Viscosity, Engine Oil.......................................................448, 449
Voice Recognition System (VR) ............................................566
11
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 603
604
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions)...........157
Warnings And Cautions ..........................................................15
Warnings, Roll Over.................................................................14
Warranty Information ............................................................589
Washers, Windshield .............................................................445
Washing Vehicle .....................................................................497
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .................................................490
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim.................................................490
Wind Buffeting ................................................................107, 110
Window Fogging ....................................................................102
Windows ..................................................................................104
Power ....................................................................................104
Windshield Defroster .............................................................258
Windshield Washers.................................................................74
Fluid ......................................................................................445
Windshield Wiper Blades ......................................................458
Windshield Wipers ...........................................................74, 445
Wipers Blade Replacement....................................................458
Wipers, Intermittent .................................................................74
Wipers, Rain Sensitive..............................................................77
2020_JEEP_CHEROKEE_OM_USA=GUID-B9F8E23F-10A5-4D6C-A585-BCFF41CCB747=1=en=.book Page 604
Printed in the U. S. A.
2020 Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
2020
20_KL_OM_EN_USC
Cherokee
First Edition
Owner’s Manual
Cherokee
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered
trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a
registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
